Scarica questo file (FTdx9000CONTEST_user)

Scarica questo file (FTdx9000CONTEST_user)
FT DX 9000 Contest
Operation Manual
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
We wish to take this opportunity to thank you for your purchase of the FT DX 9000 Series Transceiver!
The FT DX 9000 is the culmination of a four-year design project. But it also is the product of our company’s fifty years of
engineering, design, and manufacturing know how. As pioneers in the development of SSB, we have led the technological
advances in Amateur Radio communications over the last half century. And now, with the introduction of the FT DX 9000
Series, we again lead the way with a no-compromise 21st-century design that will make your operating dreams come true.
More importantly, it is a radio that will let your skills and experience find expression, as you harness the excitement of HF
operating like you’ve never done before!
ABOUT THIS MANUAL. . .
The FT DX 9000 Series is a leading-edge transceiver with a number of new and exciting features, some of which may be
unfamiliar to you. In order to gain the most enjoyment and operating efficiency from your FT DX 9000, we recommend that
you read this manual in its entirety, and keep it handy for reference as you explore the many capabilities of your new
transceiver.
Before using your FT DX 9000, be sure to read and follow the instructions in the “Before You Begin” section of this manual.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Please note the conventions, described below, for operational commands and texts included in this manual.
(#
) ..... This refers to a switch or knob used for controlling a particular function. The name or number inside the
brackets designate the name of the switch/knob, or its reference number within this manual.
XX ........... In the texts, you may be advised to press a button momentarily, or press and hold it in for a time interval (such
as two seconds). Please be sure to observe the proper procedure when pressing a button.
OO ........... This indicates the pressing of a button when a “momentary” press is the only selection available.
Note ......................................... This is used for a note as to a particular point of interest.
Advice ..................................... This is used to amplify or expand on instructions, so as to recommend a way to gain
maximum benefit from a feature or function.
Example .................................. This is used to demonstrate an example of how a feature or function should work or be
programmed.
Quick Note / Quick Point
This is used for a brief explanation of a particular aspect of operation.
Terminology ........................... An explanation of a term or expression used in this manual.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Description ........................................... 1
About This Manual. . . ........................................................................ 1
Conventions Used in This Manual ...................................................... 1
Advanced Interference
-Suppression Features .................. 54
Using the VRF (Variable RF Front-end Filter) ................................. 54
Before You Begin. . . ........................................... 4
Interference Rejection ...................................... 55
1. Connecting AC Power .....................................................................
2. Configuring Your FT DX 9000 Using the Menu ............................
3. Connecting and Selecting the Microphone .....................................
4. Extending the Front Feet .................................................................
5. Adjusting the Main Dial Torque .....................................................
6. Restarting Power after a Voltage Fluctuation ..................................
7. Resetting the Microprocessor ..........................................................
Resetting Memories (Only) ..........................................................
Menu Resetting ............................................................................
Full Reset ......................................................................................
ROOFING (Roofing Filters) .............................................................
Contour Control Operation ...............................................................
IF SHIFT Operation (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT Modes) .........................
WIDTH (IF DSP Bandwidth) Tuning
(SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT Modes) ........................
Using IF Shift and Width Together ............................................
IF Notch Filter Operation (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM Modes) ........
Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) Operation .......................................
NARROW (NAR) One-Touch IF Filter Selection ............................
Digital Notch Filter (D.NOTCH) Operation .....................................
IF Noise Blanker (NB) Operation .....................................................
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
7
Features .............................................................. 8
Accessories ...................................................... 10
Options .............................................................. 11
Installation and Interconnections .................... 12
Antenna Considerations ....................................................................
About Coaxial Cable .........................................................................
Grounding ..........................................................................................
Connection of Antenna and Power Cables ........................................
Connection of Microphone, Headphones and
FH-2 Remote Control Keypad ............
Key, Keyer, and Computer-Driven Keying Interconnections ...........
VL-1000 Linear Amplifier Interconnections ....................................
Interfacing to Other Linear Amplifiers ..............................................
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
55
56
57
58
58
59
60
61
62
62
Tools for Comfortable and
Effective Reception ................... 63
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) ........................................................ 63
SLOPED AGC Operation ........................................................... 64
Audio Limiter (AFL) Feature ............................................................ 65
SSB/AM Mode Transmission ........................... 66
Phantom Voltage for Condenser Microphones ................................. 67
Using the Automatic Antenna Tuner ............... 68
ATU Operation .................................................................................. 68
About ATU Operation ....................................................................... 69
Lithium Battery Replacement ........................................................... 70
SSB/AM Mode Transmission ........................... 72
Frequency Display ............................................ 36
Using the Speech Processor - SSB, AM Mode - ............................
Adjusting the SSB Transmitted Bandwidth ......................................
Signal Quality Enhancement Using the
Parametric Microphone Equalizer ...................................
Low- Distortion CLASS-A Operation ...............................................
Voice Memory ...................................................................................
FH-2 Operation ................................................. 37
Convenient Transmitter Accessories .............. 80
Plug/Connector Pinout Diagrams ................... 19
Front Panel Controls ........................................ 20
Rear Panel ......................................................... 34
Basic Operation:
Receiving on Amateur Bands ......... 38
Operation ...........................................................................................
Operation on 60-Meter (5 MHz) Band (U.S. Version only) .............
CLAR (Clarifier) Operation on Main (VFO-A) ................................
LOCK ................................................................................................
DIM ...................................................................................................
B-DISP OFF ......................................................................................
39
41
42
43
43
43
Convenient Features ........................................ 44
P.BACK (Audio Playback) from VFO-A Receiver ...........................
"MY Bands" Operation .....................................................................
Band Stack Operation .......................................................................
C.S (Custom Switch) .........................................................................
Rotator Control Functions .................................................................
More Frequency Navigation Techniques ..........................................
ANTENNA SELECTION ..................................................................
Receiver Operation (Front End Block Diagram) ..............................
IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) ...................................................
ATT ....................................................................................................
RF Gain (SSB/CW/AM Modes) .......................................................
Page 2
44
45
46
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
VOX: Automatic TX/RX Switching using Voice Control
SSB/AM/FM Modes .............
Using the MONITOR ........................................................................
Split Operation Using the TX Clarifier (VFO-A Operation) ...........
Clarifier Offset Bar Indicator .....................................................
Split-Frequency Operation ................................................................
Quick Split Operation ................................................................
72
73
74
76
78
80
80
81
81
82
83
CW Mode Operation ......................................... 84
Setup for Straight Key (and Straight Key emulation) Operation ......
Using the Built-in Electronic Keyer ..................................................
Full Break-in (QSK) Operation .........................................................
Setting the Keyer Weight (Dot/Space:Dash ) Ratio ..........................
Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode ................................................
84
85
85
86
86
CW Convenience Features .............................. 87
CW Spotting (Zero-Beating) .............................................................
Using CW Reverse ............................................................................
CW Delay Time Setting ....................................................................
CW Pitch Adjustment ........................................................................
Contest Memory Keyer .....................................................................
Message Memory .......................................................................
TEXT Memory ...........................................................................
87
88
89
89
90
90
92
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FM Mode Operation .......................................... 94
Operation ..................................................................... 94
Repeater Operation ...................................................... 95
Customized Option ........................................ 133
Convenient Memory Functions ....................... 96
Front Panel Controls ........................................................................ 134
Dual Receive ................................................................................... 136
Dial Swap Configuration (AF/RF GAIN Controls) ........................ 115
Changing the Speaker Output Configuration ................................. 141
Adjacent Channel Monitor (ACM) -- CW Mode Only -- ............... 142
RF Gain -- SSB/CW/AM Modes -- ................................................. 143
Using the VRF (Variable RF Front-end Filter) ............................... 144
ROOFING/R.FLT (Roofing Filters) ................................................ 145
CONTOUR/CONT (Contour) Control Operation ........................... 146
IF SHIFT Operation -- SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT Modes -- .................. 147
WIDTH (IF DSP Bandwidth) Tuning
-- SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT Modes -- ............................. 148
IF Notch Filter Operation -- SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM Modes -- . 149
NR/DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) Operation .............................. 150
Digital Notch Filter (DNF) Operation ............................................. 151
IF Noise Blanke (NB) Operation .................................................... 152
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) ...................................................... 153
Mute Feature -- VFO-A -- ............................................................... 153
Audio Limiter (AFL) Feature .......................................................... 154
ATT .................................................................................................. 154
QMB (Quick Memory Bank) ............................. 97
QMB Channel Storage ...................................................................... 97
QMB Channel Recall ........................................................................ 97
Memory Groups ................................................ 98
Memory Group Assignment .............................................................. 98
Choosing the Desired Memory Group .............................................. 98
Memory Operation ............................................ 99
Memory Storage ................................................................................ 99
Memory Channel Recall .................................................................... 99
Checking a Memory Channel’s Status ..................................... 100
Erasing Memory Channel Data ....................................................... 100
Moving Memory Data to the Main (VFO-A) Band ........................ 101
Memory Tune Operation .......................................................... 101
Operation on Alaska Emergency Frequency:
5167.5 kHz (U.S. Version Only) ............. 102
Operation on the 60-Meter Band (U.S. Version) ............................ 103
VFO and Memory Scanning ........................... 104
About Customized Option .............................................................. 133
Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) ....................... 134
VFO Scanning ................................................................................. 104
Memory Scan .................................................................................. 104
RF μ-Tuning Units
(MTU-160, MTU-80/40, MTU-30/20) .......... 156
PMS ................................................................. 105
Optional Data Management Unit (DMU-9000)/
TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) .......... 158
Packet Operation ............................................ 106
RTTY (Radio TeleType) Operation ................. 107
Miscellaneous AFSK-based Data Modes ...... 108
About the Transverter Output Terminal ........ 109
Menu Mode ..................................................... 110
Front Panel Controls ........................................................................ 158
TFT Feature / Control Details ......................................................... 160
Rear Panel Connections .................................................................. 161
Connecting a GPS Receiver ............................................................ 161
Specifications ................................................. 162
Using the Menu ............................................................................... 110
Menu Mode Reset .................................................................... 110
Menu Mode Setting Table ................................................................ 111
Menu Mode Setting ......................................................................... 115
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 3
Before You Begin. . .
1. Connecting AC Power
There are two power switches on this transceiver, one each on the rear and front panels. If the rear panel’s Power switch is
not turned on, the front panel Power switch will not function.
Push the rear panel’s Power
switch to the I position
to apply power from the
power supply to the OCXO
(Reference Crystal Oven)
and to enable the front panel
power switch.
Note
The self-check function of the CPU inside the radio will
begin. Then, if the optional RF μ-Tuning Unit is installed,
the μ-Tuning circuitry will receive the data from the CPU
and it will perform its own self-check, and will preset itself to the proper settings for the current operating frequency.
Press and hold in the front
panel Power switch for two
seconds to turn the transceiver on.
While the μ-Tuning circuitry is obtaining the data, the drive
mechanism will move from one end of its range to the
other end (fast), and this will cause a temporary “motor”
noise that can be heard; this, does not represent any trouble
or problem.
When the optional μ-Tuning Unit and/or the Data Management Unit are installed, the initialization process for
the transceiver will take about 10 seconds, after which
operation may begin.
2. Configuring Your FT DX 9000 Contest Using the Menu
The FT DX 9000 Contest is configured, at the factory, with its various functions set up in a manner typical for most operation. Via the “Menu” system, you may change these settings to match the way you want your transceiver to operate.
Menu programming is enabled by pressing the MNU
(Menu) key momentarily. You may then rotate the Main
Tuning Dial to display the desired Menu item, in the menu
list, on the LCD. Each of the settings can be changed or
customized via the CLAR/VFO-B knob, as you like, in
this mode.
Once you have made a change to the configuration of a
Menu item or items, you must press and hold in the
MNU (Menu) key for two seconds to save the new settings and exit to normal operation.
If you wish to cancel a change to a Menu item or items,
just press the MNU key momentarily. If you do not press
and hold in the MNU key in for two seconds, any changes
you have made will not be saved.
Page 4
MNU key
Main Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B Knob
MENU ITEM
MENU SETTING
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Before You Begin. . .
3. Connecting and Selecting the Microphone
The FT DX 9000 Contest comes equipped with two microphone connectors: the front panel includes a “Cannon” (XLR)
three-pin connector, while the rear panel provides an eight-pin (round) connector.
As shipped from the factory, the front panel XLR connector is engaged for operation, and the rear panel 8-pin microphone
jack is not connected. If you wish to enable the 8-pin connector instead of the XLR connector, use the Menu to accomplish
this. Note that you may leave microphones connected to both jacks, and may select the microphone you want for operation
on a particular operating mode (SSB, AM, FM, etc.), as well!
Press the MNU (Menu) key momentarily to enter
the Menu Mode.
MNU key
Rotate the Main Tuning Dial to select Menu Item
#069, located within the “MODE SSB” group: SSB
MIC SELECT.
Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob to change the setting of Menu #069 from “FRONT” to “REAR.”
Press and hold in the MNU (Menu) key for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
In a similar manner, you may use Menu #040 (AM
MIC SELECT) in the MODE-AM Menu Group to select the microphone jack to be used during AM operation, and Menu #059 (FM MIC SELECT) in the
MODE-FM Menu Group to select the microphone to
be used during FM transmission.
“FRONT”
Cannon (XLR)
three-pin connector
Main Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B Knob
“REAR”
8-pin microphone jack
4. Extending the Front Feet
In order to elevate the front panel for easy viewing, the front left and right feet of the bottom case may be extended.
Pull the front legs outward from the bottom panel.
Rotate the legs counter-clockwise to lock them in the
extended position. Be sure the legs have locked securely in place, because the transceiver is quite heavy
and an unlocked leg could result in damage, should
the transceiver move suddenly.
EXTEND
Retracting the Front Feet
Rotate the legs clockwise, and push them inward while
rotating to the right.
The front feel should now be locked in the retracted
position.
RETRACT
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 5
Before You Begin. . .
5. Adjusting the Main Dial Torque
The torque (drag) of the Main Tuning Dial may be adjusted according to your preferences. Simply hold down the rear skirt
of the knob, and while holding it in place rotate the Main Dial itself to the right to reduce the drag, or to the left to increase
the drag.
HOLD THE SKIRT
TIGHTEN
TOOSEN
6. Restarting Power after a Voltage Fluctuation
If your AC mains power should suffer a significant fluctuation or interruption, we recommend that you go through a complete power-up cycle, in order to ensure that all circuits are
properly initialized. To do this, be sure the front panel Power switch is turned off, then set
the rear-panel Power switch to the “O” position. Now unplug the AC cable from the rear
panel of the transceiver, and wait ten seconds. Plug the AC cable back in, set the rear-panel
Power switch to “O,” and now press and hold in the front-panel Power switch for two
seconds to turn the transceiver on. After about 50 seconds, all circuits will be initialized,
and normal operation may resume.
Page 6
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Before You Begin. . .
7. Resetting the Microprocessor
Resetting Memories (Only)
Use this procedure to reset (clear out) the Memory channels previously stored, without affecting any configuration changes
you may have made to the Menu settings.
1. Press the front panel’s POWER switch to turn the
transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the A M switch; while holding
it in, press and hold in the front panel’s POWER
switch to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver
comes on, you may release the A M switch.
POWER switch
A
M switch
Menu Resetting
Use this procedure to restore the Menu settings to their factory defaults, without affecting the memories you have programmed.
1. Press the front panel’s POWER switch to turn the
transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the MNU (Menu) key; while holding it in, press and hold in the front panel’s POWER
switch to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver
comes on, you may release the MNU (Menu) key.
MNU key
POWER switch
Full Reset
Use this procedure to restore all Menu and Memory settings to their original factory defaults. All Memories will be cleared
out by this procedure.
1. Press the front panel’s POWER switch to turn the
transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the FAST and LOCK switches;
while holding them in, press and hold in the front
panel’s POWER switch to turn the transceiver on.
Once the transceiver comes on, you may release the
other two switches.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
POWER switch
FAST switch
&
LOCK switch
Page 7
FEATURES
Superior Visibility and Logical, Fatigue-reducing Panel Layout
The front panel layout is logically crafted, with the large-aperture main frequency display squarely in the middle of the front panel; the
two large S-meters to the left providing instant recognition of signal strength.
Just as in an aircraft cockpit, the panel meters and the LCD are canted slightly toward the center for maximum visibility.
Large, Multi-colored VFD Fluorescent Display
A proprietary, high-brightness VFD (fluorescent) display is incorporated in the FT DX 9000 Series, providing outstanding visibility and
easy reading of the important frequency information, whether in dim or bright lighting environments.
Function-Indicating LEDs
The many function status indications on the front panel are clearly identified by the operator, thanks to the innovative multi-color LEDs
incorporated in design. A Red LED indicates that a function is engaged on the VFO-A, while an Orange LED shows that the function is
engaged on the VFO-B.
Indirect Illumination
To assist with operation in a dark environment, indirect illumination of the front panel’s knobs and switches is provided via lamps
installed beneath the meters and the BAND switch.
Aluminum-Die-Cast Oversized Main Tuning Dial
The Main Tuning Dial is a large-diameter (3.2”/81 mm) dial directly coupled to the magnetic rotary encoder which drives the HRDDS
via microprocessor control. Its heavy weight (7 oz./200 g) and quality mounting and construction provide a smooth “flywheel” effect
during operation, ideal for quick cruising up and down a band.
Oversized Knobs for Most Important Functions
The concentric AF/RF Gain, SHIFT/WIDTH, and CLAR/VFO-B knobs are conveniently located at the right-bottom side of the Front
Panel, for ease of access to these important controls.
World’s First 400 MHz HRDDS Local Oscillator
So as to optimize spurious-free dynamic range in a multi-signal environment, Yaesu’s engineers have introduced the world’s first
HRDDS (High Resolution Direct Digital Synthesizer) as the first local oscillator of the FT DX 9000 Contest. Dividing directly from this
high frequency, this local oscillator design ensures extraordinarily low noise, resulting in improved weak-signal reception even on a
crowded band during a weekend contest.
New-design Large-area OCXO Reference Oscillator
Serving as the master reference oscillator for the transceiver, the 10 MHz OCXO (Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator) is a large-area (50
x 50 mm/2” x 2”) oven-stabilized oscillator operating at high temperature, for industry-leading frequency stability rated at 0.03 ppm
over the temperature range –10 °C to +60 °C (–14 °F to +140 °F).
Triple-conversion Design with Optimized Gain Distribution
Taking into account the most efficient transceiver design concept consistent with high performance we have adopted a triple-conversion
IF structure, utilizing a first IF at 40 MHz, a second IF at 455 kHz, and the third IF at 30 kHz (for FM, the 3rd IF is at 24 kHz). Gain
distribution through all stages is carefully optimized, for preservation of high system dynamic range.
Ultra-strong Receiver Front End
YAESU’s outstanding RF-stage filtering establishes a clean performance that allows the rest of the receiver to perform at a high level. By
reducing the ingress of energy from very strong sources like Shortwave Broadcast, local AM/FM/TV stations, and other signal sources,
the overall purity of the spectrum delivered to the RF Amplifier first mixer, and subsequent stages is maintained, and the system
Blocking Dynamic Range is also enhanced.
Professional-Grade Cannon (XLR) Microphone Connector
The FT DX 9000 Contest incorporates, for the first time ever in an Amateur Radio transceiver, a balanced-input “Cannon” (XLR)
microphone connector on the front panel, for use with studio-grade professional microphones. A round 8-pin microphone jack is also
provided on the rear panel.
Two High-precision Analog Meters (Page 27)
The FT DX 9000 Contest incorporates two large (3.4”/86 mm) high-precision analog meters, for the utmost accuracy in measuring
transceiver performance. Visibility is enhanced by the oversized meter scales, making the meters easy to read at all times.
Separated Clarifier Display (Pages 42, 81)
A clearly-separated display window within the main frequency display area contains receiver and/or transmitter frequency offset (“Clarifier”) data, for quick comprehension by the operator.
YAESU Custom-designed 32-Bit Floating Point IF DSP (Page 50)
The new IF DSP system, utilizing a TI TMS320C6711 device, is a high-speed 32-bit floating point circuit designed with a unique
objective: to do away with the “digital” sound of many DSP filtering systems, and emulate the “Analog Sound” so familiar and comfortable to HF DX and Contest operators. The result is a leading-edge receiver that has the “feel” of a traditional analog receiver, but with
the flexibility and superb filtering capability of a modern digital filtering system.
Page 8
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FEATURES
VRF (Variable RF Filter) Preselector Filter (Page 54)
Yaesu’s robust VRF (Variable RF Filter) preselector provides a relay-selected RF selectivity much tighter than that afforded by traditional bandpass filter networks. Sealed relays select heavy-duty inductors and capacitors, providing a tracking RF filter that protects the
RF amplifier and following stages from strong out-of-band energy.
First IF 3 kHz Roofing Filter (Page 24, 55)
In the 40 MHz 1st IF, three selectable roofing filters are provided, in bandwidths of 3 kHz, 6 kHz, and 15 kHz, to protect the following
stages from strong signals that could degrade dynamic range in the first IF amplifier and subsequent stages. The roofing filters are
automatically assigned according to the operating mode, but the operator may override the automatic selections on the fly.
CONTOUR Filter Enhances “Analog Feeling” of DSP Filters (Page 29, 56)
The DSP-based Contour system is a unique five-band filter that may be used to roll off or peak the IF response. It is chiefly useful for
modifying the response of the ultra-sharp DSP filters, allowing you to roll off (or emphasize) certain frequency components. Often
times, the result is that a difficult-to-understand signal suddenly will pop out of the background noise as solid copy.
SLOPED AGC Circuitry (Page 64)
In traditional AGC systems, all signals rising above a certain RF level are then clamped together at the same audio output, so as to
prevent distortion throughout the IF and AF stages. In the FT DX 9000, however, you can engage the “Sloped” AGC capability to provide
an AGC response whereby ever-increasing signal strength results in a slightly-louder audio response, still without accompanying distortion. This lets you use your brain to sort out weak signals from strong ones more effectively.
Receiver AF Limiter Circuit (Page 30, 65)
Occasionally a noise burst or a sudden transmission from a loud station may startle you if you have the AF Gain turned up, and may even
damage your hearing temporarily. The FT DX 9000 Contest provides an AF Limiter (AFL) circuit which, once engaged, clamps an upper
limit on the available audio output power, much like the AGC circuit does in the RF and IF stages.
Parametric Microphone Equalizer Circuit (Page 74)
For unmatched flexibility in tailoring your microphone’s audio to match your voice, Yaesu’s engineers have incorporated the industry’s
first Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer, which allows you to enhance or suppress frequency components in three different
audio bands. Equalization may be applied independently to microphones attached to the front and rear panel microphone jacks.
Ultra-linear Class-A Operation Capability (Page 76)
The FT DX 9000 Contest’s Class-A capability provides ultra-linear amplifier operation at 75 Watts of power output. Typically, 3rd-order IMD
products are suppressed more than 50 dB, while 5th- and higher-order distortion products are at least 70 dB down during Class-A operation.
Rugged, High-Output Final Amplifier Design (Page 77)
The final amplifier stage of the FT DX 9000 Contest utilizes push-pull SD2931 MOS FET devices in a conservative, high-stability
design. The large-area die-cast aluminum heat sink is monitored thermostatically, and a quiet cooling fan will engage when the heat sink
temperature rises during long periods of high-power transmission.
Customization of Your FT DX 9000 Contest
A wide range of custom configuration options (other than a better location or taller tower!) are available for your FT DX 9000 Contest,
allowing you to build a Dream Station from the basic “Contest” version foundation.
Because these options involve high-technology modules, please consult WDXC regarding factory installation of these items.
Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
The Dual Receive Unit (model RXU-9000) not only permits simultaneous reception on two frequencies (in the same band or on
different bands), but also it enables Full Duplex operation, whereby you may be transmitting on 20 meters while, simultaneously,
receiving on 40 meters or any band other than 14 MHz. The RXU-9000 is a fully-equipped replica of the VFO-A receiver, so
reception is not compromised when using the VFO-B.
RF μ-Tuning Units (MTU-160, MTU-80/40, MTU-30/20)
On the 14 MHz and lower bands, the μ-Tuning Units provide extraordinarily high Q; the resulting steep shape factor is a powerful
aid for reducing off-frequency interference. Separate modules are available for the 1.8 MHz, 3.5/7 MHz, and 10.1/14 MHz bands,
and they may be installed on the Main Receiver only (not in the RXU-9000).
Thanks to the large (1.1"/28 mm) inductor through which a stack of ferrite cores is adjusted, the narrow RF bandwidth of the μTuning system provides unmatched protection for the receiver front end and following circuits.
Variable RF Preselector Unit (VRF-9000)
The VRF-9000 provides outstanding protection against out-of-band interference, with a bandwidth much narrower than the standard
fixed bandpass filter network. Adding the VRF-9000 can be particularly useful if your station is located near a broadcast station, or
if you use Dual Receive a lot in a multi-transmitter environment.
Data Management Unit (DMU-9000)/TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000)
In order to enable the World Clock, Spectrum Scope, Audio Scope/Oscilloscope, Logbook, Rotator Control, and Temperature/SWR
Status Display functions, you may install the Data Management Unit (DMU-9000), which actually is a mini-computer that fits inside
your transceiver. These various functions may then be displayed on a user-supplied external display screen, such as a plasma or TFT display.
Furthermore, if the TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) is installed, an external display becomes unnecessary. The TFT-9000 includes a
6.5", 800 x 480 dot screen which provides high resolution and easy viewing, as well as quick access to the control options available
on each TFT display page.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 9
ACCESSORIES
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
FH-2
Remote Control Keypad
AC Power Cord
Microphone Extend Cable
(T9101549: 8 Pin Ù Modular)
Plugs
1 AC Power Cord
USA:
T9017882
Europe:
T9013285
Australia: T9013283A
UK:
T9013285
2 This microphone cable is for use with the optional
MD-200A8X, MD-100A8X, or MH-31 B8 microphones.
Operating Manual
Warranty Card
Plug Details and Part Numbers
RCA Plug (P0091365)
6 pcs
1/4-inch 3-contact Plug
(P0090008)
2 pcs
3.5 mm 2-contact Plug
(P0090034)
2 pcs
3.5 mm 3-contact Plug
(P0091046)
1 pc
4-pin DIN Plug (P0091004) 1 pc
5-pin DIN Plug (P0091006) 1 pc
7-pin DIN Plug (P0091419) 1 pc
8-pin DIN Plug (P0090651) 1 pc
Items are shown for illustrative purposes only, and may vary slightly in appearance.
Page 10
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
OPTIONS
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
MD-200A8X
Ultra-High-Fidelity Desk-Top Microphone
MD-200A8X
Lightweight Stereo Headphones
YH-77STA
Desk-Top Microphone
MD-100A8X
External Speaker with Dual Speakers and Audio Filter
SP-9000
Linear Amplifier / AC Power Supply
VL-1000 / VP-1000
Customization Options
Dual Receive Unit
Sub Band VRF Unit
RF μ-Tuning Unit A
RF μ-Tuning Unit B
RF μ-Tuning Unit C
Data Management Unit
TFT Display Unit
RXU-9000
VRF-9000
MTU-160 (160 m Band)
MTU-80/40 (80/40 m Bands)
MTU-30/20 (30/20 m Bands)
DMU-9000
TFT-9000
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 11
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
ANTENNA CONSIDERATIONS
The FT DX 9000 Contest is designed for use with any antenna system providing a 50 Ohm resistive impedance at the desired
operating frequency. While minor excursions from the 50-Ohm specification are of no consequence, the transceiver’s
Automatic Antenna Tuner may not be able to reduce the impedance mismatch to an acceptable value if the Standing Wave
Ratio (SWR) present at the Antenna jack is greater than 3:1.
Every effort should, therefore, be made to ensure that the impedance of the antenna system utilized with the FT DX 9000
Contest be as close as possible to the specified 50-Ohm value.
Any antenna to be used with the FT DX 9000 Contest must, ultimately, be fed with 50 Ohm coaxial cable. Therefore, when
using a “balanced” antenna such as a dipole, remember that a balun or other matching/balancing device must be used so as
to ensure proper antenna performance.
The same precautions apply to any additional (receive-only) antennas connected to the RX ANT jack; if your receive-only
antennas do not have an impedance near 50 Ohms at the operating frequency, you may need to install an external antenna
tuner to obtain optimum performance.
ABOUT COAXIAL CABLE
Use high-quality 50-Ohm coaxial cable for the lead-in to your FT DX 9000 Contest transceiver. All efforts at providing an
efficient antenna system will be wasted if poor quality, lossy coaxial cable is used. This transceiver utilizes standard “M”
(“PL-259”) type connectors, except for the “RX OUT” BNC connectors used for special filters, etc.
Adapter
1/16"
3/4"
1 1/8"
3/4''
1/8''
3/8'' 5/8''
Typical PL-259 Installation
Page 12
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
GROUNDING
The FT DX 9000 Contest HF transceiver, like any other HF communications apparatus, requires an effective ground system
for maximum electrical safety and best communications effectiveness. A good ground system can contribute to station
efficiency in a number of ways:
It can minimize the possibility of electrical shock to the operator.
It can minimize RF currents flowing on the shield of the coaxial cable and the chassis of the transceiver; such currents
may lead to radiation which can cause interference to home entertainment devices or laboratory test equipment.
It can minimize the possibility of erratic transceiver/accessory operation caused by RF feedback and/or improper current flow through logic devices.
An effective earth ground system make take several forms; for a more complete discussion, see an appropriate RF engineering text. The information below is intended only as a guideline.
Typically, the ground connection consists of one or more copper-clad steel rods, driven into the ground. If multiple ground
rods are used, they should be positioned in a “V” configuration, and bonded together at the apex of the “V” which is nearest
the station location. Use a heavy, braided cable (such as the discarded shield from type RG-213 coaxial cable) and strong
cable clamps to secure the braided cable(s) to the ground rods. Be sure to weatherproof the connections to ensure many
years of reliable service. Use the same type of heavy, braided cable for the connections to the station ground bus (described
below).
Inside the station, a common ground bus consisting of a copper pipe of at least 25 mm (1”) diameter should be used. An
alternative station ground bus may consist of a wide copper plate (single-sided circuit board material is ideal) secured to the
bottom of the operating desk. Grounding connections from individual devices such as transceivers, power supplies, and
data communications devices (TNCs, etc.) should be made directly to the ground bus using a heavy, braided cable.
Do not make ground connections from one electrical device to another, and thence to the ground bus. This so-called “DaisyChain” grounding technique may nullify any attempt at effective radio frequency grounding. See the drawing below for
examples of proper grounding techniques.
Inspect the ground system - inside the station as well as outside - on a regular basis so as to ensure maximum performance
and safety.
Besides following the above guidelines carefully, note that household or industrial gas lines must never be used in an
attempt to establish an electrical ground. Cold water pipes may, in some instances, help in the grounding effort, but gas lines
represent a significant explosion hazard, and must never be used.
Transceiver
Linear
Amplifier
Power
Supply
Transceiver
Linear
Amplifier
Power
Supply
"Daisy Chain"
PROPER GROUND CONNECTION
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTION
Page 13
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTION OF ANTENNA AND POWER CABLES
1
ANTENNA "4"
ANTENNA "3"
ANTENNA "2"
ANTENNA "1"
Please follow the outline in the illustration regarding the proper connection of antenna coaxial cables, as well as the AC
power cable.
2
Use a short, thick, braided
cable to connect your station equipment to the buried ground rod (or alternative earth ground system).
Ground Rod
Advice
Do not position this apparatus in a location with direct exposure to sunshine.
Do not position this apparatus in a location exposed to dust and/or high humidity.
Ensure adequate ventilation around this apparatus, so as to prevent heat build-up and possible reduction of performance
due to high heat.
Do not install this apparatus in a mechanically-unstable location, or where objects may fall onto this product from
above.
To minimize the possibility of interference to home entertainment devices, take all precautionary steps including separation of TV/FM antennas from Amateur transmitting antennas to the greatest extent possible, and keep transmitting
coaxial cables separated from cables connected to home entertainment devices.
Ensure that the AC power cord is not subject to undue stress or bending, which could damage the cable or cause it to be
accidentally unplugged from the rear panel AC input jack.
Be absolutely certain to install your transmitting antenna(s) such that they cannot possibly come in contact with TV/FM
radio or other antennas, nor with outside power or telephone lines.
Page 14
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTION OF MICROPHONE, HEADPHONES AND FH-2 REMOTE CONTROL KEYPAD
This transceiver was shipped from the factory in configuration for a microphone input via the Front Panel XLR
connector. To use the Rear Panel microphone with an 8-pin round connector, please change the microphone set up
via the Menu.
To do this, first press the MNU key.
The Menu list will appear on the LCD display screen.
Rotate the Main tuning dial to select menu item “MODE-SSB 069 SSB MIC SELECT.”
Now rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob to change the setting to Rear.
The available selections are FRONT-REAR-DATA-PC.
5. To save the set-up, press and hold in the MNU key for 2 seconds.
If the MNU key is not held for 2 seconds, the set-up will not be saved.
Note : To use the AM or FM mode, please select Menu items 040 for AM and 059 for FM, and follow the same
procedure above.
1.
2.
3.
4.
② MIC-Hot
① MIC-GND
③ MIC-Cold
XLR connector Type Microphone
1/4-inch 3-contact jack
Stereo Headphones
① UP
⑧ MIC
⑦ MIC GND
⑥ PTT
② +5V
③ DOWN
⑤ GND
④ FAST
8-pin Connector Type Microphone
LOCK
ON
OFF
FH-2 Remote Control
Keypad
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 15
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
KEY, KEYER, AND COMPUTER-DRIVEN KEYING INTERCONNECTIONS
The FT DX 9000 Contest includes a host of features for the CW operator, the functions of which will be detailed in the
“Operation” section later. Besides the built-in Electronic Keyer, two key jacks are provided, one each on the front and rear
panels, for convenient connection to keying devices.
The Menu system allows you to configure the front and rear panel KEY jacks according to the device you wish to connect.
For example, you may connect your keyer paddle to the front panel KEY jack, and use Menu #42 for paddle input, while
connecting the rear panel’s KEY jack to the keying line from your personal computer (which emulates a “straight key” for
connection purposes), and configure the rear panel jack using Menu #44.
Both KEY jacks on the FT DX 9000 Contest utilize “Positive” keying voltage. Key-up voltage is approximately +5V DC,
and key-down current is approximately 1 mA.
2
DOT DASH
COMMON
DOT DASH
COMMON
Advice
When connecting a key or other device to the KEY jacks, use only a 3-pin (“stereo”) 1/4” phone plug; a 2-pin plug will
place a short between the ring and (grounded) shaft of the plug, resulting in a constant “key-down” condition in some
circumstances.
Page 16
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
VL-1000 LINEAR AMPLIFIER INTERCONNECTIONS
Be sure that both the FT DX 9000 Contest and VL-1000 are turned off, then follow the installation recommendations
contained in the illustration.
On the rear panel of the VL-1000, please set the “ATT” switch to the “ON” position. The 200-Watt power output from the
FT DX 9000 Contest is far in excess of what is required to drive the VL-1000 to its full rated output.
Note
Please refer to the VL-1000 Operating Manual for details regarding amplifier operation.
Please do not attempt to connect or disconnect coaxial cables when your hands are wet.
About the CONTROL Cable
Control Cable Modification
The VL-1000 may be operated with the FT DX 9000
Contest whether or not the CONTROL Cable is connected; however, the CONTROL Cable allows you
to tune up the amplifier automatically by just pressing the F SET or TUNE key on the VL-1000,
so as to transmit a carrier for tuning purposes.
Pin 9
F SET COMMON
Pin 3
GND
Pin 11
F SET 2
Pin 7
TRQ
Please cut off the RCA connector on one end of the
CONTROL Cable supplied with the VL-1000, and
install a 7-pin DIN connector in its place, according to the illustration.
To link the FT DX 9000 Contest and VL-1000 Power
switches, set the VL-1000 REMOTE switch to the
ON position.
INPUT 1
ANT 3
ANT 1
ANT 2
ANTENNA
~AC IN
ANT
ANTENNA CABLE( Supplied w/VL-1000)
ANT 1
REMOTE
PTT 1
INPUT 1
ON
OFF
ANT 2
PTT 2
BAND DATA 1
INPUT 2
ALC 1
ANT 3
CONTROL
ALC 2
2
ANT 4
1
DC48V IN
GND
CONTROL
DC 48V IN
VP-1000
GND
CONTROL CABLE( User constructed)
VP-1000
ALC 1
BAND-DATA 2
BAND DATA CABLE( Supplied w/VL-1000)
BAND-DATA 1
BAND DATA 1
BAND DATA 2
EXT ALC
GND
BAND DATA 2
ALC CABLE( Supplied w/VL-1000)
¾
¾
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 17
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
RF IN
GND
FUSE
AC
GND ALC GND RELAY
GND
TX GND
EXT ALC
RF OUT
GND
INPUT 1
ANT 1
~AC IN
HF Antenna
ANTENNA CABLE(50Ω)
ANT 2
ANT 1
50 MHz
Antenna
INTERFACING TO OTHER LINEAR AMPLIFIERS
Note
The TX/RX switching in the linear amplifier is controlled by switching components in the transceiver. The relay circuit
of the FT DX 9000 Contest used for this switching is capable of switching AC voltage of 100 Volts at up to 300 mA, or
DC voltages or 60 V at 200 mA or 30 V at up to 1 Amp. In order to engage the switching relay, use Menu item “TX
GNRL 156 EXT AMP TX-GND” within the “TX GNRL” Menu Group; set this Menu selection to “ENABLE” to
activate the amplifier switching relay.
The specified range for ALC voltage to be used with the FT DX 9000 Contest is 0 to –4 Volts DC.
Amplifier systems utilizing different voltages will not work correctly with the FT DX 9000 Contest, and their ALC lines
must not be connected if this is the case.
Page 18
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
PLUG/CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS
BAND DATA1
CAT
N/A
SERIAL OUT
SERIAL IN
N/A
GND
N/A
N/A
N/A
NC
BAND DATA2
+13V
TX GND
GND
BAND DATA A
BAND DATA B
BAND DATA C
BAND DATA D
LINEAR
EXT ALC
TX GND
GND
NC
NC
TXINH
FSET
(as viewed from rear panel)
(as viewed from rear panel)
(as viewed from rear panel)
PACKET
ROTATOR
RTTY
RT1
RT2
RT3
RT4
GND
NC
DATA IN
GND
PTT
DATA OUT
BUSY
RX OUT
PTT
GND
SHIFT
(as viewed from rear panel)
(as viewed from rear panel)
(as viewed from rear panel)
MIC (XLR)
MIC
RCA PLUG
UP
+5V
DOWN
FAST
GND
PTT
MIC GND
MIC
MIC-GND
MIC-Hot
MIC-Cold
(as viewed from front panel)
(as viewed from rear panel)
REMOTE
AF OUT
GND
MAIN(VFO-A)
EXT SPKR
GND
GND
PHONE
SUB
SIGNAL or(+)
SUB(VFO-B)
SIGNAL
MAIN
GND or(-)
GND
SIGNAL
KEY
For Internal Keyer
For Straight Key
DOT DASH COMMON
KEY
GND
Do not use
2-conductor type plug
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 19
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
MOX Switch
PHONES Jack
Pressing this button engages the PTT (Push to Talk)
circuit, to activate the transmitter. It must be in the
undepressed position for reception. This switch replicates the action of the Push to Talk (PTT) switch on
the microphone. When engaging the MOX switch,
or otherwise causing a transmission to be started, be
certain you have either an antenna or 50-Ohm dummy
load connected to the selected Antenna jack.
A 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts either monaural or
stereo headphones with 2- or 3-contact plugs. When a
plug is inserted, the loudspeaker is disabled. With stereo headphones such as the optional YH-77STA, you
can monitor both VFO-A and VFO-B receiver channels at the same time during Dual Receive operation.
Note: When wearing headphones, we recommend that
you turn the AF Gain levels down to their lowest settings before turning power on, to minimize the impact
on your hearing caused by audio “pops” during switchon.
VOX Switch
VOX Operation: This button enables automatic voiceactuated transmitter switching in the SSB, AM, and
FM modes. While activated, the LED inside this button glows red. The controls affecting VOX operation
are the front panel’s VOX and DELAY knobs
(see section ( ) below. By proper adjustment of these
controls, hands-free voice-actuated operation is possible.
DIM Switch
Press this button to lower the illumination intensity of
the analog meters, the frequency display, and the LCD.
Press it once more to restore full brightness.
Advice
Menu Items “DISPLAY 014 DIMMER-METER” and
“DISPLAY 015 DIMMER-VFD” allow you to configure the dimming levels for the analog meters and
the frequency display/LCD independently, so you can
customize the brightness levels.
Page 20
POWER Switch
Press and hold in this switch for two seconds to turn
the transceiver on, after first setting the rear panel
Power switch to the “I” position. Press and hold in
this switch for two seconds, similarly, to turn the transceiver off. If the rear panel’s Power switch is set to the
“O” position, the front panel POWER switch will
not function.
Advice
This is the actual power On/Off switch for turning on
the transceiver. When the rear panel’s Power switch is
set to the ( I ) position, power is supplied to the OCXO
to stabilize the reference oscillator, and the remainder
of the transceiver is set in a “stand-by” mode, awaiting the command for the transceiver to switch on via
the front panel POWER switch. For further information on the rear panel Power switch, please see the
discussion on page 34.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
KEY Jack
ANTENNA SELECT Switches
This 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or
keyer paddles (for the built-in electronic keyer), or
output from an external electronic keyer. Pinout is
shown on page 16. Key up voltage is 5 V, and key
down current is 1 mA. This jack may be configured
for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or computer keying
interface operation via Menu Selection “MODE-CW
041 F-KEYER TYPE” (see page 120). There is another jack with the same name on the rear panel, and
it may be configured independently for Internal Keyer
or pseudo-straight-key operation.
These momentary buttons select the antenna jack on
the rear panel, with the selection indicated by the LED
in each button. When an antenna has been selected
for operation on the VFO-A, the LED in the button
glows red. When an antenna has been selected for
operation on the VFO-B, the LED in the button glows
umber.
Note
You cannot use a 2-contact plug in this jack (to do so
produces a constant “key down” condition).
Cannon (“XLR”)
Microphone Connector
This Cannon-type (XLR) connector accepts input from
the Microphone or other XLR-equipped microphone
system. MIC connector pinout is shown on page 15.
Proper microphone input impedance is 500 ~ 600
Ohms.
If you are using a condenser microphone requiring 48
Volts DC, you may enable this voltage to appear on
the microphone line; see page 67. When the 48-volt
supply line has been enabled, the LED adjacent to the
MIC jack will glow red.
To disconnect the microphone plug, draw out the microphone plug while pressing and holding in the silver push-button.
IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) Switch
The IPO(A) Lamp-button may be used to set the
optimum receiver front end characteristics of the VFOA circuit for a very strong-signal environment. Selecting IPO bypasses the front end RF amplifier and feeds
the received signals directly to the first mixer of the
VFO-A receiver circuit. While the IPO feature is activated, this button will remain illuminated.
The IPO(B) Lamp-button, similarly, allows direct
feed of the received signals to the first mixer of the
VFO-B circuit. While the IPO feature is activated on
the VFO-B, this button will be lit.
Advice
The FT DX 9000 Contest’s first mixer is an active type,
using four SST310 Junction FETs. This mixer design
provides gain to the receiver chain, so the noise figure
of the receiver is fundamentally lower than with some
other designs. Therefore, it frequently is not necessary to utilize the RF preamplifier, and the receiver
Intercept Point will be substantially increased by engaging IPO, so as to feed the incoming signals directly
to the first (active) mixer. We recommend that IPO be
switched on whenever possible.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
TUNE Switch
This is the on/off switch for the FT DX 9000 Contest’s
Automatic Antenna Tuner.
Pressing this button momentarily places the antenna
tuner in line between the transmitter final amplifier
and the antenna jack (the LED will become illuminated). Reception is not affected.
Pressing and holding in this button for 1/2 second,
while receiving in an amateur band, activates the transmitter for a few seconds while the automatic antenna
tuner rematches the antenna system impedance for
minimum SWR. The resulting setting is automatically
stored in one of the antenna tuner’s 100 memories,
for instant automatic recall later when the receiver is
tuned near the same frequency.
Pressing this button momentarily, while the Tuner is
engaged, will take the Automatic Antenna tuner out of
the transmit line.
Note
When the Automatic Antenna tuner is tuning itself, a
signal is being transmitted. Therefore, be absolutely
certain that an antenna or dummy load is connected to
the selected antenna jack before pressing and holding
in the TUNE button to start antenna tuning.
METER Switch
This control switch determines the function of the Main
Meter during transmission.
COMP:
Indicates the RF speech compressor level
(SSB modes only).
PO:
Indicates the power output level.
SWR:
Indicates the Standing Wave Ratio (Forward: Reflected).
IDD:
Indicates the final amplifier drain current.
MIC LVL: Indicates the relative microphone level.
MONI (Monitor) Switch
This button enables the transmit (RF) monitor in all
modes (except CW, in which the monitor function is
always on, to produce the sidetone). While activated,
the LED in this button glows red. Adjustment of the
Monitor level is accomplished using the MONI
knob, located just to the right of the MONI switch.
Advice
When using headphones, the Monitor is highly useful
for making adjustments to the Parametric Equalizer
or other voice quality adjustments, because the voice
quality heard in the headphones is such a “natural”
reproduction of the transmitted audio quality.
Page 21
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
AGC
ATT Knobs
AGC Knobs
This switch selects the AGC characteristics for the
VFO-A.
ATT Knobs
This switch selects the degree of attenuation, if any,
to be applied to the VFO-A.
Advice
The Attenuator may be used in conjunction with the
IPO switch (# , described previously) to provide
two stages of signal reduction when an extremely
strong signal is being received.
MONI
PITCH Knobs
MONI Knob
The inner MONI knob adjusts the audio level of
the transmit RF monitor during transmission (relative to the AF GAIN control: # , described
later), when activated by the MONI button (# ,
described previously).
PITCH Knob
The outer PITCH knob selects your preferred CW
tone pitch (from 300 ~ 1000 Hz, in 50 Hz increments). The Tx sidetone, receiver IF passband, and
display offset from the BFO (carrier) frequency are
all affected simultaneously. The Pitch control setting also affects the operation of the CW Tuning Indicator, as the center frequency of the CW Tuning
Indicator will follow the setting of this control.
Page 22
MIC
PROC Knobs
MIC Knob
The inner MIC knob adjusts the microphone input
level for (non-processed) SSB transmission.
Advice
If you adjust the MIC Gain while speaking in a louderthan-normal voice level and watching the ALC level on
the right-side meter, adjust the MIC Gain so that the
ALC reaches over to the right edge of the ALC scale.
Then, when you speak in a more normal voice level,
you’ll be certain not to be over-driving the mic amplifier stage.
PROC Knob
The outer PROC knob sets the compression (input)
level of the transmitter RF speech processor in the SSB
and modes, when activated by the button with the same
name (see next section).
PROC (Processor) Switch
This button enables the RF speech processor for SSB
transmission. Processing level is set by the outer control with the same name (see previous section). While
activated, the LED in this button glows red.
Advice
The Speech Processor is a tool for increasing the average power output through a compression technique.
However, if the PROC level control is advanced too
far, the increase in compression becomes counter-productive, as intelligibility will suffer. We recommend that
you monitor the sound of your signal using the Monitor
(with headphones), then advance the PROC level only
as far as required to obtain a useful increase in average
power output.
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU-9000)
and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed, you
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
may use the Audio Scope/Oscilloscope page on the
TFT to help you adjust the setting of the Compression
Level of the Speech Processor for the optimum performance using your voice and microphone.
VOX
DELAY Knobs
VOX Knob
The inner VOX knob sets the gain of the VOX circuit, to set the level of microphone audio needed to
activate the transmitter during voice operation while
the VOX switch (# , described previously) is engaged. The VOX switch must be switched On to
engage the VOX circuit.
DELAY Knob
The outer DELAY knob sets the hang time of the
VOX circuit, between the moment you stop speaking,
and the automatic switch from transmit back to receive. Adjust this for smooth VOX operation, so the
receiver is only activated when your transmission is
ended and you wish to receive.
For CW operation, you can adjust the keying delay
below.
separately; see control #
KEYER Switch
This button toggles the internal CW keyer on and off.
While activated, the LED in this button glows red. The
Keyer sending speed, and the CW Hang Time are adjusted via the controls described in the next section.
SPEED
CW DELAY Knobs
The internal Electronic Keyer is activated by the
KEYER switch, described in the previous section.
SPEED Knob
The inner SPEED knob adjusts the keying speed of
the internal CW keyer. Clockwise rotation increases
the sending speed.
CW DELAY Knob
This outer CW DELAY knob sets the hang time of
the CW “VOX” circuit, between the moment you stop
sending, and the automatic switch from transmit back
to receive during “Semi-break-in” operation. Adjust
this just long enough to prevent the receiver from being restored during word spaces at your preferred sending speed. Clockwise rotation increases the hang time.
Note
The SSB VOX hang time is adjusted via the DELAY control (# , described previously).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
BK-IN/SPOT Switches
This button turns the full break-in (QSK) CW capability on and off. While QSK is activated, the LED in
this button glows red.
The SPOT button turns on the CW receiver spotting tone; by matching the SPOT tone to that of the
incoming CW signal (precisely the same pitch), you
will be “zero beating” your transmitted signal on to
the frequency of the other station.
NB/SQL Knobs
NB Knob
The inner NB knob adjusts the noise blanking level
when the (analog) IF noise blanker is activated by pressing the NB switch (# below). The Noise Blanker
is activated via the NB switch, described in the next
section.
SQL Knob
The outer SQL knob sets the signal level threshold
at which VFO-A audio is muted, in all modes. It is
very useful during local rag-chews, to eliminate noise
between incoming transmissions. This control is normally kept fully counter-clockwise (off), except when
scanning and during FM operation.
NB Switch
Pressing this button activates the (analog) IF Noise
Blanker, which may help reduce many different types
of man-made impulse noise (but not atmospherics).
When the Noise Blanker is activated, the LED inside
the button will glow red. Adjustment of the Noise
Blanker level is accomplished via the NB knob (#
above), described in the previous section.
Page 23
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
KEY Jack
This 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or
keyer paddles (for the built-in electronic keyer), or
output from an external electronic keyer. Pinout is
shown on page 16. Key up voltage is 5 V, and key
down current is 1 mA. This jack may be configured
for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or computer keying
interface operation via Menu item “MODE-CW 041
F-KEYER TYPE” (see page 120). There is another
jack with the same name on the rear panel, and it may
be configured independently for Internal Keyer or
pseudo-straight-key operation.
Note
This Key jack is connected in parallel with the jack
with the same name on the front panel.
You cannot use a 2-contact plug in this jack (to do so
produces a constant “key down” condition).
PHONES Jack
A 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts either monaural or
stereo headphones with 2- or 3-contact plugs. When a
plug is inserted, the loudspeaker is disabled. With stereo headphones such as the optional YH-77STA, you
can monitor both VFO-A and VFO-B channels at the
same time during Dual Receive operation.
Note
This Phones jack is connected in parallel with the jack
with the same name on the front panel.
When wearing headphones, we recommend that you turn
the AF Gain levels down to their lowest settings before
turning power on, to minimize the impact on your hearing caused by audio “pops” during switch-on.
Page 24
ROOFING Switch
This button selects the bandwidth for the VFO-A
receiver’s first IF Roofing Filter. Available selections
are 3 kHz, 6 kHz, 15 kHz, or Auto, and the LED indicator will change according to the bandwidth selected.
Advice
Because the roofing filter is in the first IF, the protection it provides against interference is quite significant. When set to AUTO, the SSB bandwidth is 6 kHz,
while CW is 3 kHz and FM/RTTY are 15 kHz. On a
crowded SSB band, however, you may wish to select
the 3 kHz filter, for the maximum possible interference rejection.
D.NOTCH Switch
This button turns the VFO-A Digital Notch Filter on
and off. When the Digital Notch Filter is activated,
the LED indicator will glow red. This is an automatic
circuit, and there is no adjustment knob for the
D.NOTCH.
MODE Switches
A, B Button
Pressing the A or B switch will illuminate the
respective indicator imbedded within the switch, allowing adjustment of the operating mode on the VFOA or VFO-B. Pressing the A switch causes the indicator to glow Red, signifying VFO-A is being adjusted.
Similarly, pressing the B switch will cause its indicator to glow Orange, signifying VFO-B adjustment.
Advice
When changing bands, be sure to press the A or
B switch first, then press the appropriate Band selector switch, so as to change operating frequencies
on the proper (VFO-A or VFO-B).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
LSB, USB, CW, AM, FM, RTTY, PKT Button
Pressing the LSB , USB , CW , AM , FM ,
RTTY , or PKT button will select the operating
mode. Pressing the CW , AM , RTTY , or
PKT button multiple times will switch between the
alternate operating features that can be used on these
modes (covered later). Also, when you press and hold
in the PKT button for one second, the user-programmed custom function setting mode will be activated.
RX Indicator/Switch
This switch, when pressed, engages the VFO-A ; the
indicator will glow Green when the VFO-A is active.
When the VFO-A is active, pressing this button momentarily will mute the receiver, and the indicator will
blink. Pressing the button once more will restore receiver operation, and the indicator will glow Green
steadily.
TX Indicator/Switch
STO (Store) Button
Pressing this button copies operating information (frequency, mode, bandwidth, and also repeater direction/
shift frequency and CTCSS functions on the FM mode)
into consecutive QMB Memories.
RCL (Recall) Button
Pressing this button recalls one of up to five Quick
Memory Bank memories for operation.
When this button is pushed, the indicator will glow
Red, and the transmitter will be engaged on the same
frequency and mode as was set up for the VFO-A (subject to any Clarifier offset, of course).
Advice
If this indicator is not illuminated, it means that the
VFO-B TX indicator has been selected (it will be glowing Red). In this case, transmission will be effected
on the frequency and mode programmed for the VFOB.
NAR (Narrow) Switch
Main Dial Knob
In the SSB/CW mode, this button is used to set the
bandwidth of the DSP IF filters to a user-programmed
bandwidth (default values are SSB: 1.8 kHz, CW/
RTTY/PSK: 300 Hz, AM: 6 kHz). When NAR has
been engaged, the WIDTH knob will be disabled.
In the AM mode, this button is used to toggle the
receiver’s bandwidth between wide (9 kHz) and narrow (6 kHz).
In the FM mode on the 28 MHz and 50 MHz bands,
this button is used to toggle the FM deviation/bandwidth between wide (± 5.0 kHz Dev./25.0 kHz BW)
and narrow (± 2.5 kHz Dev./12.5 kHz BW).
Pressing the A or B button (located above the
MODE selection buttons) will select either the VFOA or VFO-B for individual bandwidth setting.
Advice
When NAR has been engaged, the WIDTH knob
will be disabled, although IF Shift still works normally.
This large knob adjusts the operating frequency of the
VFO-A or a recalled memory. Clockwise rotation of
this knob increases the frequency. Default tuning increments are 10 Hz (100 Hz in AM and FM modes);
when the FAST switch is pressed, the tuning steps
increase. The available steps are:
*Numbers in parentheses indicate steps when the [FAST] switch is On.
SPLIT Switch
FAST Switch
QMB (Quick Memory Bank) Switch
Pressing this button to activates split frequency operation between the VFO-A, used for transmission and
VFO-B, used for reception. The same name LED located at the right of the main tuning knob glows orange
while this function is active.
If you press and hold in the SPLIT switch for two
seconds, the “Quick Split” feature will be engaged,
whereby the VFO-B will automatically be set to a frequency 5 kHz higher than the VFO-A frequency, and
the transceiver will be placed in the Split mode.
TXW “TX Watch” Switch
Pressing this key lets you monitor the transmit frequency when split frequency operation is engaged.
When receiving on the transmit frequency, the LED
indicator will glow green. Press this key again to return to normal operation.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Operating Mode
1 Step*
1 Dial Rotation
LSB/USB/CW/RTTY/PKT(LSB) 10 Hz (100 Hz) 10 kHz (100 kHz)
AM/FM/PKT(FM)
100 Hz (1 kHz) 100 kHz (1 MHz)
Advice
The tuning steps for the Main Tuning Dial (described in this section) are set, at the factory, to 10 Hz
per step. Via Menu item “TUNING 129 MAIN DIAL
STEP,” however, you may change this setting from
10 Hz to 1 Hz instead. When 1 Hz basic steps are
selected, the action of the FAST button (#
below) will be changed to 1/10 of the values listed above.
Pressing this button will increase or decrease the tuning rate of the Main Tuning Knob (#
above) by
a factor of ten, as mentioned in the previous section.
When this function is activated, the LED inside the
button will glow red.
LOCK Switch
This button toggles locking of the main tuning knob,
to prevent accidental frequency changes. When the
button is active, the Main Tuning Knob (# , described previously) can still be turned, but the frequency will not change, and the LED inside the button will glow red.
Page 25
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
C.S Switch
CLASS-A Switch
Press this button momentarily to recall a favorite Menu
Selection directly.
To program a Menu selection as the short-cut, press
the MNU key (# , described later) to enter the
Menu, then select the item you want to set as the shortcut. Now press and hold in the C/S key for two seconds; this will lock in the selected Menu item as the
short-cut.
Pressing this switch engages the Class-A capability
for the transmitter. The power output will be reduced
to a maximum of 75 Watts, and the Bias level may be
adjusted using the BIAS control (#
above), described in the previous section. When Class-A operation is engaged, the Red LED inside this switch will
light up. Press this switch once more to return to Class
AB operation at a maximum power output of 200
Watts; the Red LED will shut off to confirm Class AB
operation.
RF PWR
BIAS Knobs
RF PWR Knob
This is the main RF Power output control for the transceiver, active in all operating modes. Clockwise rotation increases the power output. Adjust this control
for the desired power output from the FT DX 9000
Contest, or for the desired system output when using
a linear amplifier or transverter.
BIAS Knob
During SSB operation, pressing the CLASS-A button (# below) will lower the power output to a maximum of 75 Watts, and the BIAS control will then
provide adjustment of the final amplifier Bias level
between classes AB and A. Full Class-A operation provides an ultra-clean SSB wave-form. Because Class
A is a high-bias, low-efficiency mode, you should
monitor the heat sink temperature (using the “SWR”
page on the LCD periodically to ensure that the operating temperature is within the safe range, and you
may adjust the Bias level more toward the “AB” side
if the heat sink gets too warm. The power output will
not change if you adjust the setting of the BIAS
control.
Page 26
AX
X B Switch
Press this button momentarily to transfer data from the
VFO-A frequency (or a recalled memory channel) to
the VFO-B, overwriting any previous contents in the
VFO-B. Use this key to set both VFO-A and VFO-B to
the same frequency and mode.
BX
X A Switch
Press this button momentarily to transfer data from
the VFO-B frequency to the VFO-A, overwriting any
previous contents in the VFO-A. Use this key to set
both VFO-A and VFO-B to the same frequency and
mode.
AXW B Switch
Pressing this button momentarily exchanges the contents of the VFO-A (or a recalled memory channel)
and the VFO-B.
V/M Switch
This button toggles VFO-A operation between the
memory system and the VFO. Either “VFO,” “MEM,”
or “M TUNE” will be displayed to the left of the main
frequency display field to indicate the current selec-
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
tion. If you have tuned off of a Memory channel frequency (M TUNE), pressing this button returns the
display to the original memory contents (MEM), and
pressing it once more returns operation to the VFOA.
SPLIT Indicator
MX
X A Switch
In the standard FT DX 9000 Contest version, this indicator does not function.
When the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is
installed, the Dual Indicator will be available for use.
Pressing this button momentarily displays the contents
of the currently-selected memory channel for three seconds.
Holding this button in for 2 seconds copies the data
from the currently-selected memory to the VFO-A, as
two beeps sound. Previous data in the VFO-A will be
overwritten.
AX
X M Switch
Pressing and holding in this key for 1/2 second (until
the double beep) copies the current operating data from
the VFO-A into the currently selected memory channel, overwriting any previous data stored there.
Also, pressing and holding in this button after recalling a memory, without first retuning, causes the
memory channel to be “masked,” and repeating the
process restores the masked memory.
A-BUSY Indicator
This LED glows green whenever the VFO-A squelch
is open. If this indicator is not illuminated, and reception seems to have been “lost” on the VFO-A for no
apparent reason, check the position of the SQL control (# , described previously) and rotate it fully
counter-clockwise to restore reception.
TX Indicator
This indicator glows Red during transmission.
If you attempt to transmit while operating outside of
an Amateur band, this indicator will blink Red, indicating an “out of band” condition.
B-BUSY Indicator
This LED glows green whenever the VFO-B squelch
is open. If this indicator is not illuminated, and reception seems to have been “lost” on the VFO-B for no
apparent reason, check the position of the SQL control (# , described previously) and rotate it fully
counter-clockwise to restore reception.
Tuning Offset Indicator
This is a tuning scale that, as configured from the factory, provides a visual CW tuning indication of the
incoming signal’s offset from your transceiver’s CW
carrier frequency, as programmed by the position of
the PITCH control (# , described previously).
Advice
Using Menu item “DISPLAY 016 BAR DISPLAY
SELECT,” you can choose indication of the CW TUNE, Clarifier, VRF, or IF Notch function.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
This indicator glows Red when the “Split” mode is
engaged (with the VFO-A and VFO-B operating on
different frequencies).
DUAL Indicator
HI SWR Indicator
This indicator glows Red if the directional coupler
and microprocessor detect an abnormally high SWR
condition (over 3.0:1) that cannot be resolved by the
Automatic Antenna Tuner.
Note
If this indicator lights up, check to be sure that you
have the correct antenna selected on the current operating band. If so, you will need to check the condition
of the antenna, its coaxial cable, and/or the connectors on the cable so as to locate and correct the fault.
S-Meter (VFO-A)
There are five functions on the main multi-meter. The
bottom five selections in the list below are transmit
functions, determined by the position of the METER
switch (# , described previously):
S:
Indicates the received signal strength on
the VFO-A, from S-0 to S9 +60 dB.
PO:
Indicates the RF Power Output, from 0 to
250 Watts on transmit.
COMP: Indicates the compression level of the
speech processor, from 0 to 20 dB.
IC:
Indicates the final amplifier drain current
(ID), from 0 to 15 A.
SWR:
Indicates the antenna system observed
standing wave ratio (SWR), from 1.0 to
5.0.
MIC LVL: Indicates the relative level of modulation
from the microphone amplifier stage (affected by the setting of the MIC Gain
control: # , described previously).
S-Meter (VFO-B)
On receive, this meter displays signal strength of incoming signals as received on the VFO-B.
On transmit, this meter serves as the ALC meter. The
function of this meter, on transmit, can be changed to
indication or PA Voltage (VDD) via Menu item “DISPLAY 019 RIGHT TX METER.”
ALC: Display of relative ALC voltage. On SSB, the
ALC level is chiefly controlled via the MIC
Gain control (# , described previously).
VDD: Final amplifier FET Drain Voltage (nominal
value: 50 V).
Page 27
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
VDD
BIAS
TEMP
SWR
Frequency Display (See Page 36)
BIAS Switch
The upper large display field indicates the current operating frequency on the VFO-A, and its TX/RX status.
The lower small display field indicates the current operating frequency on the VFO-B, and its TX/RX status.
Pressing this switch enables display of the final amplifier FET Bias Level currently in use; a red LED
will light up to confirm your selection.
During Class-A operation, the Bias Level will indicate “0%” during Class AB operation, and “100%”
during Class A. Because the power output is fixed
when the “Class A” mode has been engaged, you may
adjust the Bias Level, according to the measured temperature, anywhere between Class AB and Class A,
without having to worry about the drive level being
applied to your linear amplifier.
LCD Display
This 1.8 inch LCD display is used for viewing the
status of the VFO-A and VFO-B VFOs, and it indicates the Menu listing.
VDD/BIAS Meter
You may observe the Drain Voltage on the final amplifier FETs, using this meter. As well, the current Bias
Level being utilized may be observed. Press the
VDD (# below) or BIAS (# below) switch
to select the desired information.
VDD Switch
Pressing this switch enables display of the final amplifier FET Drain Voltage on the VDD/BIAS meter
(# above); a red LED will light up to confirm your
selection. The display range is 0 ~ 60 Volts, and a
reading of 50 Volts is normal during transmission.
Page 28
TEMP/SWR Meter
This meter allows monitoring of the heat sink temperature or the SWR as measured at the rear-panel
Antenna jack.
Press the TEMP (# below) or SWR (# below) switch to select the desired display function.
TEMP Switch
Pressing this switch enables monitoring of the heat
sink temperature; a red LED will light up to confirm
your selection.
The measurement range for the temperature display is
0 °C ~ 100 °C, and there are four stages of cooling fan
speed that will,, progressively, increase the air flow if
the temperature rises to near the “red zone” (80 °C or
higher). Because of the advanced cooling system, there
should never be a circumstance where the temperature will rise this high, but if you are operating in a hot
environment, in Class A, and are making long transmissions, you may wish to reduce the Bias Level closer
to Class AB to reduce the heat dissipation associated
with Class A operation.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
SWR Switch
NR Knob
Pressing this switch enables display of the antenna
system SWR; a red LED will light up to confirm your
selection. The SWR measured at the rear panel Antenna Jack will be displayed during transmission.
This knob selects the optimum VFO-A Digital Noise
Reduction response. The Noise Reduction circuit is
engaged via the NR switch (# below).
BAND Keys
This button turns the Digital Noise Reduction circuit
on and off. When the Digital Noise Reduction is activated, the LED inside the button will glow umber.
Adjustment of the Noise Reduction level is provided
by the NR knob (#
above).
These keys allow selection of the operating band.
One key is provided for each Amateur band between
1.8 MHz and 50 MHz (except for the 60-meter band,
covered via the Memory system).
As well, direct frequency entry of the desired operating frequency may be accomplished using these keys.
If you press and hold in the ENT key for two seconds, the frequency display area will change to indicate the rotator position, if you have a YAESU
G-800DXA/-1000DXA/-2800DXA rotator’s control
cable connected to the rear panel of the transceiver,
and you can then control the position of the rotator
from the front panel.
CONTOUR Knob
This knob selects the desired VFO-B CONTOUR filter response. The CONTOUR filter is engaged via the
CONT switch (#
below).
CONT Button
This button turns the CONTOUR filter on and off.
When the CONTOUR filter is activated, the LED inside the button will glow umber. Adjustment of the
CONTOUR filter’s center frequency is provided by
the CONTOUR knob (#
above).
Quick Note
There are times, when you’re trying to remove interference with a sharp DSP filter, that the remaining signal has a somewhat unnatural sound. This is caused
by the cutting of some frequency components, leaving other components in excess. The CONTOUR filter allows you (especially) to roll off certain frequency
components inside the remaining passband, but in a
smooth manner that helps restore a natural sound and/
or raise intelligibility.
Advice
The action of the CONTOUR filter may be adjusted via Menu item “RX DSP 078 MAINCONTOUR-LEVEL” and “RX DSP 079 MAINCONTOUR-WIDTH.”
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed, you may use the Audio Scope on the Audio Scope/Oscilloscope page on the TFT to help
you adjust the setting of the Contour control for
the optimum performance. The effect of the Contour adjustments will be easy to see on the Audio
Scope.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
NR Switch
VRF/μ Knob
This knob tunes the passband of the RF filter (18 MHz
and higher Amateur bands) for maximum receiver sensitivity (and out-of-band interference rejection).
Quick Point
When the optional RF μ-Tuning Unit is installed, this
knob allows adjustment of the center frequency of the
μ-Tuning filter passband.
VRF/μ Switch
This button turns the VRF filter on and off. While activated, the LED inside the button will glow red.
Quick Point
When the optional RF μ-Tuning Unit is installed,
pressing this switch will engage the μ-Tuning
preselector function. The μ-Tuning Units provide
much better RF selectivity than any other RF filter in
the Amateur industry, yielding outstanding protection
from high RF levels not far removed from the current
operating frequency.
NOTCH Knob
This adjusts the center frequency of the IF Notch filter, when engaged by the NOTCH switch (# below).
NOTCH Switch
This button turns the VFO-A IF notch filter on and
off. When the IF notch filter is activated, the LED
inside the button will glow red. The Notch Filter center frequency is adjusted via the NOTCH knob (#
above).
Advice
The width of the notch may be set to either “Wide”
or “Narrow” via Menu item “RX DSP 082 IFNOTCH-WIDTH” in the RX DSP Menu Group.
Setting this selection to “Narrow” will provide a
very sharp notch, with minimal disturbance to the incoming signal wave-form.
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed, you may use the Audio Scope on the Audio Scope/Oscilloscope page on the TFT to help
you adjust the setting of the Notch filter control
for the optimum performance. The effect of the
Notch filter adjustments will be easy to see on the
Audio Scope.
Page 29
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
VDD
BIAS
TEMP
SWR
MNU Key
P.BACK Switch
This key is used to engage the configuration Menu.
When this key is pressed the Menu Mode information
will appear on the LCD, allowing selection and adjustment of the various Menu items.
Use the Main Tuning Dial (# , described previously) to select the desired Menu item, then use the
CLAR/VFO-B knob (# , described later) to adjust the setting of the selected Menu item. When you
are done, press and hold in the MNU key for two
seconds to save the revised settings and exit to normal operation.
Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds to activate
the recording feature of the internal Digital Voice Recorder. The Voice Recorder allows you to record the
VFO-A audio for the most-recent 30 seconds. While
you’re recording the receiver audio, the LED in this
button glows red.
Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds once more
to stop the recording, then press this button momentarily again to play back the receiver audio for the
most-recent 30 seconds of reception before you
stopped the recording.
While playing back the receiver audio, the LED inside button will glow umber.
Press and hold in this button for 2 seconds again to
resume recording.
AF GAIN
RF GAIN Knobs
AF GAIN Knob
Clockwise rotation of this control increases the Volume level. Typically, you will operate with this control set past the 9 o’clock to 10 o’clock position.
RF GAIN Knob
This is the control that adjusts the gain of the VFOA’s RF and IF stages. Clockwise rotation increases
the gain level, and this control typically is left in the
fully clockwise position, which provides maximum receiver gain.
Page 30
AFL Switch
Pressing this button activates the Audio (AF) Limiter
circuit of the VFO-B. This will protect the audio amplifier from distortion, and protect your ears from high
audio levels, caused by sudden peaks in audio input
when the AGC is set to “OFF.” When the Audio Limiter circuit is activated, the LED inside the button will
glow orange.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
SHIFT
WIDTH Knobs
(except on AM and FM mode)
SHIFT Knob
The inner SHIFT knob provides adjustment of the
IF DSP passband, using 20 Hz steps for precise adjustment and easy reduction of interference on either
side of your operating frequency. The total adjustment
range is ± 1 kHz.
The normal operating setting for this knob is straight
up, in the 12 o’clock position.
WIDTH Knob
The outer WIDTH knob, when turned to the 12
o’clock position, sets the overall IF bandwidth of the
VFO-A to its maximum bandwidth. Turning the
WIDTH knob either direction, reduces the overall
IF bandwidth of the VFO-A.
When the NAR (Narrow) filter selection is engaged,
this control is disabled. The SHIFT control, however, is still fully functional.
Use this control to narrow the IF DSP passband, as
necessary, to reduce interference. The SHIFT control may be used to re-center the passband response
on the incoming signal, and you may find that the
CONTOUR and IF NOTCH filters may also help improve intelligibility and/or reduce interference.
Advice
When the NAR switch has been pushed, the
WIDTH control no longer functions. The IF SHIFT
system is still fully operational, however.
ACM (Adjacent Channel monitor) Switch
(CW Mode only)
RX Indicator/Switch
This is the switch that turns the VFO-B On and Off.
When this button is pressed to make the VFO-B active, the Green LED imbedded within the switch will
light up. Pressing the switch again will disable this
receiver, and the imbedded Green LED will turn off.
TX Indicator/Switch
This is the switch that turns the VFO-B transmitter
On and Off. When this button is pressed to transfer
transmitter control to the VFO-B frequency and mode,
the Red LED imbedded within the switch will light
up. Pressing this switch once more will transfer frequency/mode control back to the VFO-A side, and the
Red LED imbedded within this switch will turn off.
CLAR (Clarifier) Switch
When this switch is pushed, the CLAR/VFO-B knob
(# , described later) will be enabled for the purpose
of utilizing the CLAR/VFO-B knob as an “Offset
tuning” control to allow tuning away from the VFO-A
frequency.
BAND/MHz Switch
BAND Switch
Pressing this button momentarily allows you to select
the VFO-A operating band (Amateur bands) using the
CLAR/VFO-B knob (# , described later).
MHz Switch
Pressing and holding in this button for 2 seconds allows you to tune the VFO-A frequency down or up in
1 MHz increments, using the CLAR/VFO-B knob
(# , described later).
In the standard FT DX 9000 Contest version, this switch
does not function.
When the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is
installed, the Adjacent Channel Monitor will be available for use (because it utilizes the second receiver to
provide the ACM function).
B-DISP OFF Switch
Advice
When the RXU-9000 is installed, engaging ACM utilizes the VFO-B to monitor a 2.4 kHz window outside your current CW passband (for example, 500 Hz)
for the VFO-A. The peak signal strengths within this
2.4 kHz window are displayed on the VFO-B’s Smeter, alerting you to encroachment from other stations. The ACM results are only displayed on the Smeter, you will not be annoyed by the audio from the
potentially-interfering stations.
MCH/GRP Switch
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Pressing this button causes the VFO-B frequency to
be blanked out, for local rag-chews or other occasions
when the additional display information is not needed.
When this function is activated, the LED inside the
button will glow green.
MCH Switch
Pressing this button momentarily allows you to select
the memory channel using the CLAR/VFO-B knob
(# , described later).
GRP Switch
Pressing and holding in this button for 2 seconds allows you to select the memory group using the CLAR/
VFO-B knob (# , described later).
Page 31
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
VDD
BIAS
TEMP
SWR
CLAR/VFO-B Knob
Depending on the status of the A/B switch (# , described later) the CLAR/VFO-B is used for functions associated with the VFO-A or VFO-B frequency control registers.
Advice
Functions Associated with VFO-A Control
In the case of VFO-A control, this knob is used for Clarifier tuning, as well as Up/Down selection of the Amateur band, Memory Channels, 1 MHz
tuning steps, or Memory Groups. For VFO-A control, be sure that the Orange lamp beside this control is not illuminated. If the Orange lamp is
turned on, press the A/B switch (# ) to turn it off.
Clarifier Operation
BAND/MHz Up/Down Control
When the CLAR switch (# ) is pushed, this knob may be used to
program an offset of up to ± 9.99 kHz from the VFO-A frequency.
This offset is only applied, however, to the receive or transmit frequency if the FAST/RX switch (# ) and/or BAND/MHz / TX
switch (# ), respectively, have been pushed.
To apply the programmed frequency offset to the Receive frequency,
press the FAST/RX switch momentarily. To return to the VFO-A
frequency, without the offset, press the FAST/RX switch once more.
To apply the programmed frequency offset to the Transmit frequency,
press the BAND/MHz / TX switch momentarily. To return the transmitter to the VFO-A frequency, without the offset, press the BAND/
MHz / TX switch once more.
To reset the Clarifier frequency to “0” offset, press the B.MODE/
CLEAR switch (# ).
When the BAND/MHz switch (# ) is pressed momentarily, the
Red LED imbedded in the switch will light up, and you may then use
this knob for selecting the desired Amateur band. If you have engaged the “My Bands” feature via Menu #135, this knob will select
from among just the Amateur bands that you have included in the
“My Bands” list.
If you press and hold in the BAND/MHz switch for 2 seconds, the
imbedded LED will glow Orange, and this knob may now be used
for rapid tuning in 1 MHz frequency steps.
Memory Channel/Memory Group Control
Pressing the MCH/GRP switch (# ) momentarily will enable the
use of this knob for selection of the desired Memory Channel.
Pressing and holding in the MCH/GRP switch for two seconds will
enable the use of this knob for selecting the desired Memory Group.
Functions Associated with VFO-B Operation
When the A/B switch (# ) is pressed, the Orange lamp to the right of the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) will light up, and this knob will now
be exercising control functions associated with the VFO-B frequency control register. If the Orange lamp is not illuminated, please press the
A/B switch. Rotation of the knob will now control the VFO-B frequency.
VFO-B FAST Tuning
When the FAST/RX switch (# ) is pressed, the imbedded LED
will light up, and tuning of the VFO-B frequency will increase by a
factor of 10. Press the FAST/RX switch once more to return to the
normal tuning rate.
VFO-B BAND/MHz Up/Down Control
If you press the BAND/MHz / TX switch (# ) momentarily, the
imbedded LED will light up, and this knob may now be used for
selection of the desired Amateur band. Pressing the BAND/MHz /
TX switch once again will cancel Up/Down Band selection, and the
LED will turn off.
If you press and hold in the BAND/MHz / TX switch for 2 seconds, the imbedded LED will light up, and this knob may now be
Page 32
used for Up/Down tuning of the VFO-B frequency in 1 MHz steps.
Press the BAND/MHz / TX switch momentarily to cancel Up/Down
tuning; the imbedded LED will turn off.
VFO-B Mode Selection
When the B.MODE/CLEAR switch (# ) is pressed, the imbedded LED will light up, and this knob may now be used for selection
of the operating mode for VFO-B operation. Pressing the B.MODE/
CLEAR switch once more will cancel mode selection, and the imbedded LED will turn off.
Note
Mode selection may also be accomplished by pressing the A/B
switch (# ), then pressing the appropriate MODE switch (# )
to the left of the Main Tuning Dial (# ).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
FAST/RX Switch
B.MODE/CLEAR Switch
FAST Switch
When the A/B switch (# , described later) is
pushed, and the Orange lamp to the right of the
CLAR/VFO-B knob lights up, the CLAR/VFOB knob (#
above) will be controlling the VFO-B
frequency; pressing the FAST/RX switch will increase the tuning rate by a factor of 10.
RX Switch
When the CLAR switch (# , described previously)
is pressed (and its imbedded LED is illuminated),
pressing the FAST/RX switch applies the programmed Clarifier offset to the VFO-A receive frequency. Press the FAST/RX switch once more to
return the VFO-A to the frequency shown on the main
frequency display field; the Clarifier offset will still
be present, though, in case you want to use it again.
To cancel the Clarifier offset, press the B.MODE/
CLEAR switch (# , described later).
B.MODE Switch
When the A/B switch (#
below) is pressed, and
the Orange lamp to the right of the CLAR/VFO-B
knob (# , described previously) lights up, pressing
the B.MODE/CLEAR switch allows you to rotate
this knob for selection of the operating mode to be
used on the VFO-B.
CLEAR Switch
When the CLAR switch (# , described previously)
is pressed (and its imbedded LED is illuminated),
pressing the B.MODE/CLEAR switch clears out any
frequency offset you have programmed into the Clarifier register (thereby setting the offset to “Zero”).
BAND/MHz / TX Switch
BAND/MHz
When the A/B switch (# , described later) is
pressed, and the Orange lamp to the right of the
CLAR/VFO-B knob (# , described previously)
lights up, pressing the BAND/MHz switch allows
you to rotate this knob for selection of the Amateur
band to be used for the VFO-B.
TX Switch
When the CLAR switch (# , described previously)
is pressed (and its imbedded LED is illuminated),
pressing the BAND/MHz / TX switch applies the
programmed Clarifier offset to the VFO-A transmit
frequency. Press the FAST/RX switch ( , above)
once more to return the transmitter to the VFO-A frequency shown on the main frequency display field;
the Clarifier offset will still be present, though, in case
you want to use it again. To cancel the Clarifier offset,
press the B.MODE/CLEAR switch (# , described
later).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
A/B Switch
The A/B switch controls the determines whether
the actions of the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# , described previously) will be applied to the VFO-A
(“CLAR” option), or the VFO-B (“VFO-B option”).
Pressing this switch once causes the Orange lamp to
the right of the CLAR/VFO-B knob to light up; in
this case, rotation of the CLAR/VFO-B knob affects operation on the VFO-B band (tuning, etc.).
Pressing the A/B switch once more causes the Orange lamp to turn off; in this instance, rotation of the
CLAR/VFO-B knob affects operations associated
with the VFO-B (Clarifier function, etc.).
Page 33
REAR PANEL
2
1
Main Power Switch
ANT
Connect your main antenna(s) here, using a type-M
(PL-259) plug and coaxial feedline for each. These
antenna ports are always used for transmission, and
also are used for reception unless a separate receive
antenna is also used for the VFO-A. The internal antenna tuner affects only the antenna(s) connected here,
and only during transmission. These connectors utilize TeflonR insulation for extreme durability and to
ensure stable impedance over the entire frequency range.
This is main power On (I )/Off (O ) switch of the
FT DX 9000 Contest. Always turn this switch on before
turning on the front panel’s POWER button.
If this switch is not turned On, the front panel Power
switch will not function.
Turning this Main Power switch On supplies voltage
to the OCXO (Crystal Oven), ensuring that frequency
stability is always maintained even when the transceiver is turned off via the front panel’s POWER
switch (# ).
RX OUT
AC IN
These BNC jacks provide output of the receiver signal lines from the Antenna jacks which are connected
to the VFO-A and VFO-B front ends.
ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A)
ANT “1”
TX/RX RELAY
Transmitter
Section
ANT “2”
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A)
ANT “3”
ANT “4”
VFO-A/-B SWITCH
Receiver
Section
RX OUT
(A)
BPF
RX ANT
RX OUT
(B)
ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-B)
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-B)
RX ANT
This type-M jack is for a separate receive-only antenna. An antenna connected here can be used, by both
the VFO-A and VFO-B, when the RX ANT button
(# ) on the front panel is pressed.
If you want to use some special kind of external
bandpass filter or preamplifier, you may connect it
between the RX OUT and RX ANT jacks, as shown
in the illustration.
Page 34
Connect the supplied 3-wire AC line cord to this
socket. AC voltages of 100-240 V may be accommodated by the FT DX 9000 Contest without any sort of
modification (universal voltage input).
CIRCUIT BREAKER Switch
This circuit breaker shuts off in the event of dangerously high current consumption by the transceiver.
Advice
If the Circuit Breaker interrupts power, by all means
try to determine the cause of the over-current condition before re-applying power. To restore the Circuit
Breaker after verifying that all is normal, push this
switch in until you hear a “click.”
MIC
This 8-pin jack accepts input from a microphone utilizing a traditional YAESU HF-transceiver pinout.
REMOTE
By plugging in the supplied FH-2 Remote Control
Keypad to this gold-plated jack, direct access to the
FT DX 9000 Contest CPU is provided for control functions such as contest memory keying, plus frequency
and function control.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
REAR PANEL
+13.8V
TRV
This gold-plated output jack provides regulated, separately fused 13.8 VDC at up to 200 mA, to power an
external device such as a packet TNC. Make sure your
device does not require more current (if it does, use a
separate power source).
This gold-plated RCA jack provides a low level RF
output for use with a transverter. Maximum output is
approximately –20 dBm (0.01 mW) at 50 Ohms.
PTT
This gold-plated input jack may be used to provide
manual transmitter activation using a footswitch or
other switching device. Its function is identical to the
MOX button on the front panel. The same line is available at the PACKET and RTTY jacks for TNC control. Open-circuit voltage is +13.5 VDC, and closedcircuit current is 5 mA.
PATCH
This gold-plated RCA input jack accepts transmitter
audio - either AFSK or voice - for transmission. This
line is mixed with the microphone audio input line, so
the microphone should be disconnected if using this
jack and mixing is not desired. The optimum impedance is 500 ~ 600 Ohms, and the nominal input level
should be 1 mV.
EXT SPKR
The EXT SPKR two-contact output jacks are gold
plated, providing audio from the VFO-A and VFO-B
for an external loudspeaker or speakers, such as the
SP-8. Inserting a plug into one of these jacks disables
the corresponding internal loudspeaker. Impedance is
4 ~ 8 Ohms.
ACC
This is an accessory jack which is used at the factory
for adjustment of the radio. Please do not connect any
cable or accessory to this terminal.
TXGND
This jack’s center pin is closed to ground while the
transceiver’s transmitter is engaged. It may be used
for control of a peripheral device, most typically a
linear amplifier. To enable this jack, please set Menu
item “TX GNRL 156 EXT AMP TX-GND” to the
“ENABLE” selection. This RCA connector is goldplated, and the specifications are shown below.
BAND DATA
BAND DATA1
This 7-pin output jack used for control of the VL-1000
Solid-state Linear Amplifier.
BAND DATA2
This 8-pin output jack provides band selection data
which may be used for control of optional accessories
such as the VL-1000 Solid-state Linear Amplifier.
EXT ALC
This gold-plated RCA input jack accepts negative-going external ALC (Automatic Level Control) voltage
from a linear amplifier, to prevent over-excitation by the
transceiver. Acceptable input voltage range is 0 to -4 VDC.
AF OUT
ROTATOR
This gold-plated 3-contact jack provides dual-channel low-level receiver output, for recording or external amplification. Peak signal level is 3 Vrms at 10
kOhms. VFO-A audio is on the left channel (tip), and
VFO-B audio is on the right channel (ring). A stereo
amplifier or recorder is recommended, to record each
receiver’s audio separately when dual reception is enabled (audio from either receiver, or both, may be used
via this jack). The front panel AF GAIN knobs do
not affect the signals at this jack.
This 5-pin MINI-DIN Jack accepts a cable connected
to a YAESU G-800DXA/-1000DXA/-2800DXA Antenna Rotator. You may control the antenna azimuth rotation (and rotation speed) using the Function buttons on
the front panel. (Listed models are current as of early 2005).
RTTY
This 4-pin input/output jack provides connections for
an RTTY terminal unit. Pinout is shown on page 107.
The receiver audio level at this jack is at a constant
100-mV (@600 Ohms) level. FSK keying at this jack
is accomplished by a closure of the SHIFT line to
ground by the terminal unit.
PACKET
This 5-pin input/output jack provides receiver audio
and squelch signals, and accepts transmit (AFSK) audio and PTT control, from an external Packet TNC.
Pinout is shown on page 106. The receiver audio level
at this jack is approximately 100 mV (@600 Ohms).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
KEY
This 1/4-inch gold-plated phone jack accepts a CW key
or keyer paddle. A 2-contact plug cannot be used in this
jack. Key-up voltage is +5 V, and key-down current is 1
mA. Plug wiring is shown on page 16, and this jack may
be configured for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or computer keying interface operation via Menu Selection
“MODE-CW 043 R-KEYER TYPE” (see page 120).
CAT
This 9-pin serial DB-9 jack allows external computer
control of the FT DX 9000 Contest. Connect a serial
cable here and to the RS-232C COM port on your
personal computer (no external interface is required).
GND
Use this terminal to connect the transceiver to a good
earth ground, for safety and optimum performance.
Use a large diameter, short braided cable for making
ground connections, and please refer to page 13 for
other notes about proper grounding.
Page 35
FREQUENCY DISPLAY
VFO-A TX/RX Indicators
These combination lamp-buttons select and indicate
the transmit/receive status of the VFO-A. When the
green “RX” lamp is lit, the receiving frequency is under control of the Main Tuning Dial (# ) and display (either VFO-A or a recalled memory channel).
When the red “TX” lamp is lit, the transmitting frequency is under control of the main knob and display.
Thus, for “normal” (non-split) operation, both the red
and green lamps associated with the Main Tuning
Dial will be illuminated.
VFO-A Frequency Display
This is the VFO-A frequency display.
Advice
The Tone Encoder/Decoder frequency is indicated
during the setup process.
VFO-B TX/RX Indicators
These combination lamp-buttons select and indicate
the transmit/receive status of the VFO-B.
VFO-B Frequency Display
This is the VFO-B frequency display.
Advice
The Tone Encoder/Decoder frequency is indicated
during the setup process.
Page 36
Multi-Panel
This field within the frequency display area provides
several indications, depending on the frequency control mode in use:
CLAR (Clarifier)
This window displays the Clarifier frequency offset
from the VFO-A frequency. The Clarifier is engaged
when the CLAR LED is illuminated.
MR (Memory Recall)
When the MCH/GRP switch is pushed, the currently-selected Memory channel or Memory Group
number will be displayed in this window.
MT (Memory Tune)
If you rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) (or change
the mode) during memory operation, the transceiver
will change into the “Memory tune” mode to indicate
that the memory contents have been temporarily
changed; “
” lights up to confirm this change.
Repeater Shift Data
During FM operation, the Repeater Shift will be indicated in this window.
A Negative frequency shift will be indicated by “–”
while a Positive frequency shift will be indicated by
“+” in the window. During Simplex operation (no
shift), “S” will be displayed.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FH-2 OPERATION
The supplied Remote Control Keypad “FH-2” can be used to control the voice memory capability for the SSB/AM/FM
modes, and the contest memory keyer for the CW mode. You can also play back up to 30 seconds of incoming received
audio, as well, for verification of a missed callsign or other purposes. Among the specific capabilities of the FH-2 are:
Five channels of storage and playback of voice memory (20 seconds each), using your own voice for recording (see
page 78).
Playback of the last 30 seconds of incoming receiver audio (see page 44).
On CW, the FH-2 provides storage and recall of CW messages for repetitive CQ and contest number transmissions.
LOCK
ON
Voice Memory/CW Message Memory
Selection Keys (5 Channels)
In the case of Voice Memory, up to 20 seconds of
audio may be stored on each channel.
For CW messages and CW Text messages, up to 50
characters (“PARIS” specification) may be stored
into each channel.
Text Memory Programming Keys
These keys are used for navigation when selecting
text characters for the programming of Contest and
Text memories.
Playback Key
OFF
LOCK Switch
This switch may be used to lock out the FH-2’s keys, to
prevent accidental activation of FH-2 operation.
MEM Key
This key is pressed for the purpose of storing either a
Voice Memory or a Contest Keyer Memory channel’s
contents.
DEC Key
When utilizing the sequential contest number capability of the Contest Keyer, press this key to decrement
(back up) the current Contest Number by one digit (i.e.
to back up from #198 to #197, etc.).
This key replicates the action of the P.BACK
(“Playback”) switch on the front panel of the transceiver, and is used for playing back the last 30 seconds of recorded receiver audio.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 37
BASIC OPERATION: RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
Before turning on main power, please verify the following items once more.
Have you made all ground connections securely? See page 13 for details.
Do you have your antenna(s) connected to the rear-panel Antenna jack(s)? See page 14 for details.
Is your microphone (and/or key or paddle) connected? See pages 15 and 16 for details.
If using a linear amplifier, have all interconnections been successfully completed? See page 17 for details.
Please rotate both AF GAIN controls to their fully counter-clockwise positions, to avoid a loud blast of audio when
the transceiver turns on. See pages 30 and 39 for details.
Rotate the RF PWR control fully counter-clockwise, to set minimum power at first. See pages 26 and 70 for details.
Before attempting voice transmissions, you must be certain that the microphone you intend to use is plugged into an
“Active” microphone jack. On the front panel is a 3-pin “Cannon” (XLR) connector, and on the rear panel you’ll find
a “traditional” 8-pin round connector. At the factory, the XLR connector is selected, but you may easily change this
using the Menu item “MODE-SSB 069 SSB MIC SELECT;” please confirm that this Menu item is configured
appropriately.
Note
If the wrong microphone jack is selected, voice transmission will not be possible.
If your AC mains power should suffer a significant fluctuation or interruption, we recommend that you go through a
complete power-up cycle, in order to ensure that all circuits are properly initialized. To do this, be sure the front panel
Power switch is turned off, then set the rear-panel Power switch to the “O” position. Now unplug the AC cable from the
rear panel of the transceiver, and wait ten seconds. The start-up procedure is described on the next page.
Page 38
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION: RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
RX switch
(VFO-A)
BAND key
VDD
POWER swtch
MODE switch
1. Plug the AC cable back in, set the rear-panel
Power switch to “I.”
2. Press and hold in the front-panel
POWER switch (# ) for two seconds
to turn the transceiver on.
Transceiver will start up on 7.000.00
MHz LSB, and normal operation may
resume.
Note
To turn power off, press and hold in the front panel
POWER switch for two seconds.
Quick Note
It will take around 10 seconds until the transceiver is
ready for full operation.
3. Rotate the AF GAIN
knob (# ) to set a comfortable audio level on incoming signals or noise. Clockwise rotation of the AF
GAIN knob increases the
volume level.
Note
When using headphones, start by rotating the AF
GAIN control counter-clockwise, then bring the volume level up after you put the headphones on. This
will minimize the chance of damage to your hearing
caused by an unexpectedly-high audio level.
4. Press the RX (# ) switch to engage the VFO-A,
the imbedded LED will glow Green.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
BIAS
T EMP
SWR
AF GAIN knob
CLAR/VFO-B knob
(VFO-A)
BAND/MHz switch
A/B swtch
5. Press the A switch (# ) to enable
the capability to change the operation
for the VFO-A the imbedded LED
will glow Red.
6. Press the BAND key (# ) corresponding to the
Amateur band on which you wish to begin operation.
Advice
One-touch selection of each Amateur band between 1.8 and 50 MHz is provided.
If you press the BAND/
MHz key (# ) momentarily, the CLAR/
VFO-B knob (# )
may be used as a band selection knob. If the
CLAR/VFO-B knob is
pressed and held in for two seconds, rotation of
the BAND/MHz (# ) key allows frequency
navigation in 1 MHz steps.
When the BAND/MHz key’s imbedded LED
is illuminated, the CLAR/VFO-B knob controls
the functions associated with the BAND/MHz
key.
Advice
Depending on the setting of the A/B switch
(# ), the function of the CLAR/VFO-B knob
(# ) will change. Please see page 32 for more
details.
The FT DX 9000 Contest utilizes a triple bandstack VFO selection technique, that permits you
to store up to three favorite frequencies and modes
onto each band’s VFO register. For example, you
may store one frequency each on 14 MHz CW,
RTTY, and USB, then recall these VFOs by successive, momentary presses of the 14 MHz band
key (# ). Each Amateur band key may similarly
have up to three frequency/mode settings applied.
Page 39
BASIC OPERATION: RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
ANTENNA SELECT switch
FAST switch
VDD
SQL knob
Main tuning dial
BIAS
T EMP
SWR
CLAR/VFO-B knob
MODE switch
7. Press one of the ANTENNA SELECT (1~4)
switches (# ) to select the appropriate antenna for
the band in use; alternatively, if one is connected, you
may also press the RX antenna selection switch
(# ). Up to four TX/RX antennas may be connected,
or one RX-only antenna.
Advice
Once you have made your antenna selection, that antenna is “remembered” by the microprocessor in conjunction with the VFO register (frequency and mode)
in use when you chose that particular antenna.
8. Press the appropriate MODE key (# ) to select
the desired operating mode.
Advice
By convention in the Amateur bands, LSB is used
on the 7 MHz and lower bands (with the exception of 60 meters), while USB is utilized on the
14 MHz and higher bands.
When changing modes from SSB to CW, you will
observe a frequency shift on the display. This shift
represents the BFO offset between the “zero beat”
frequency and the audible CW pitch (tone) you
can hear (the pitch is programmed by the
PITCH control (# )), even though the actual
tone that you hear is not changing. If you do not
want this frequency shift to appear when changing modes from (for example) USB to CW, use
the Menu item “MODE-CW 050 CW FREQ
DISPLAY,” described on page 121.
When operating on the FM mode, rotate the
SQL (Squelch) control (# ) clockwise just
to the point where the background noise is just
silenced. This is the point of maximum sensitivity to weak signals.
Page 40
9. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial
knob (# ) to tune around the band,
and begin normal operation.
Quick Note
Clockwise rotation of the
Main Tuning Dial knob increases the operating frequency,
one “step” of the synthesizer at
a time; similarly, counter-clockwise rotation of the Main
Tuning Dial knob will decrease the frequency.
Two steps, one “normal” and one “fast,” are available on each operating mode. Pressing the
FAST key (# ) engages the “Fast” tuning selection.
Operating Mode
1 Step
LSB, USB, CW, RTTY, 10 Hz [100 Hz]
PKT(LSB)
AM, FM, PKT(FM)
100 Hz [1 kHz]
1 Dial Rotation
10 kHz [100 kHz]
100 kHz [1 MHz]
[ ]: FAST switch set to “ON”
It is possible to separate the frequency change over
one dial rotation, while operating solely on the
CW mode, using the Menu items “TUNING 129
MAIN DIAL STEP,” and “TUNING 130 MAIN
DIAL CW FINE.” See page 129.
If you want to navigate quickly, so as to effect
rapid frequency change, there are several techniques available:
o Direct keyboard frequency entry of the frequency (see page 48).
o Use the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to tune
in 1 MHz steps (see page 48).
o Use the microphone’s Up/Down scanning keys,
if your microphone is so equipped.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION: RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
OPERATION ON 60-METER (5 MHZ) BAND (U.S. VERSION ONLY)
The FT DX 9000 Contest includes the capability for transmission and reception on the five spot frequencies assigned to the
Amateur Service in the United States. To operate on the 5 MHz band:
1. Press the V/M key (# ) once to enter the
“Memory” mode (a memory channel number “USX”
will appear on the Multi-Panel in the display.
2. Memory channels “US1” through “US5” are pre-programmed, at the factory, with the permitted frequencies in the 5 MHz band, and the USB mode is automatically selected on these channels.
3. To exit from 60-meter operation and return to the VFO
mode, just press the V/M key.
V/M key
Note
The frequencies and operating mode for 5 MHz band operation are both fixed, and may not be changed.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 41
BASIC OPERATION: RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
CLAR (CLARIFIER) OPERATION ON MAIN (VFO-A)
The CLAR button and CLAR/VFO-B knob are used to offset either the receive, transmit, or both frequencies from
their settings on the VFO-A frequency (the Clarifier does not affect the , however). The four small numbers on the Multi
Display Window show the current Clarifier offset. The Clarifier controls on the FT DX 9000 Contest are designed to allow
you to preset an offset (up to ± 9.999 kHz) without actually retuning, and then to activate it via the Clarifier’s RX (FAST
RX) and TX (BAND/MHz TX) buttons. This feature is ideal for following a drifting station, or for setting small frequency
offsets sometimes utilized in DX “Split” work.
Here is the technique for utilizing the Clarifier:
RX key
CLAR/VFO-B knob
1. Press the CLAR switch (# ). The LED imbedded in
the switch will glow Red, and “CLAR” will appear on the
display to signify that rotation of the CLAR/VFO-B
knob (# ) will allow setting of a frequency offset.
2. Press the FAST/RX switch (# ). On the display,
“RX” will appear, and the programmed offset will be
applied to the receive frequency.
3. Rotation of the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) will allow you to modify your initial offset on the fly. Offsets of up to ± 9.99 kHz may be set using the Clarifier.
CLAR key
CLEAR key
To cancel the application of the offset to the receiver frequency temporarily, press the FAST/RX switch (# ).
The “CLAR RX” notation will disappear from the display.
To cancel Clarifier operation, press the CLAR switch.
Advice
Turning the Clarifier Off simply cancels the application of
the programmed offset from the receive and/or transmit
frequencies. To clear out the programmed Clarifier offset
altogether, and reset it to “zero,” press the CLAR switch.
The programmed offset is displayed in the small multichannel window of the frequency display.
Note
If the Clarifier seems not to be operating, check to see if
the Orange lamp to the right of the CLAR/VFO-B knob
is illuminated. If so, pressing the A/B (# ) switch will
cause the Orange lamp to the right of the CLAR/VFOB knob to go out. Now press the CLAR switch to begin Clarifier operation.
TXCLAR
Without changing the receive frequency, you may
alternatively apply the Clarifier offset to the transmit frequency (typically, for “split” DX pile-ups).
See page 81 for details.
The LED Bar Display provides a graphical representation of the Clarifier offset.
On CW, the Bar Display field is used for CW Center Tuning, instead of Clarifier Offset, as the transceiver is configured
at the factory. If you wish to change this, so that the Clarifier Offset is also displayed on CW, use the following procedure:
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select
Menu item “DISPLAY 016 BAR DISPLAY SELECT.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select
“CLAR” (replacing the default “CW-TUNE” selection).
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Page 42
(TX frequency < RX frequency)
(TX frequency = RX frequency)
(TX frequency > RX frequency)
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION: RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
LOCK
You may lock the setting of the Main Tuning Dial, to prevent accidental frequency change.
To lock out the Main Tuning Dial (# ), just press the
LOCK switch (# ) that is located to the right of the
Dial. To unlock the Dial setting, and restore normal tuning, just press the LOCK switch once more.
LOCK switch
DIM
The illumination level of the analog meters, main frequency display, and the LCD display may be reduced, if you are using
the transceiver in a dark environment where high brightness is not desired.
To reduce the illumination level, press the DIM switch
(# ), located to the left of the leftmost analog meter. To
restore full brightness, press the DIM switch once more.
DIM switch
You may also customize the amount of brightness reduction
engaged by the pressing of the DIM switch, and may use
different brightness levels for different front panel areas.
Menu item “DISPLAY 014 DIMMER-METER” adjusts
the brightness level of the analog meters and LCD display,
while menu item “DISPLAY 015 DIMMER-VFD” sets the
brightness levels of the main frequency display (these settings are effective only when the DIM switch is pressed).
LCD Display Brightness Adjustment
By following the procedure below, you may adjust the brightness level of the LCD window.
1. Press the front panel’s POWER switch (#
to switch the main transceiver power off.
2. Press and hold in the SWR key (# ) while
turning on the transceiver main power (press
and hold in the POWER switch for two
seconds). Once power comes on, release the
SWR key; the LCD window will now be
configured for setting of the brightness level.
) for two seconds
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to set the brightness
level. You can observe the brightness level changing on the LCD
window.
4. When you have finished your adjustment, press the SWR
switch momentarily to save the new setting.
B-DISP OFF
During monoband operation, you may wish to disable (temporarily) the display of the Sub (VFO-B) band frequency.
To do this, press the B-DISP OFF switch (# ), found
at the lower left side of the CLAR/VFO-B knob.
Press the B-DISP OFF switch once more to restore the
Sub (VFO-B) band frequency display.
B-DISP OFF switch
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 43
CONVENIENT FEATURES
P.BACK (AUDIO PLAYBACK) FROM VFO-A RECEIVER
Once engaged by the operator, the FT DX 9000 Contest begins the automatic recording of the last 30 seconds of incoming
receiver audio on the VFO-A. This capability is especially useful for confirming a callsign that may have been difficult to
copy due to noise or QRM, etc.
Recording
Press and hold in the P.BACK key (# ) for two seconds to initiate recording; an LED imbedded in the switch
will light up to confirm that recording is in progress. The
recorder will store up to 15 seconds of the VFO-A received
audio, and will retain the most-recent 15 seconds of audio
on a running basis.
P.BACK switch
Pressing the P.BACK switch once more will halt the recording, and the LED imbedded in the switch will go out.
Note
When the transceiver is turned off, the contents of the recording memory are erased!
Playback
Press the P.BACK key (# ) momentarily, after recording has been halted, to begin playback of the recorded
audio. The last 15 seconds of audio will be heard in the
speaker or headphones. If you do not intervene, the entire
30 seconds will be played back, after which the playback
will stop automatically. To halt playback at any time, just
press the P.BACK key momentarily again. The next time
you press the P.BACK key, it will pick up the playback
where you left off.
Stop
Start
15 Seconds
The P/B key of the supplied FH-2 Keypad can also serve as a remote-control recording/playback switch. Operation
is described below.
Recording
Press and hold in the FH-2’s P/B key for two seconds to initiate recording.
The front panel P.BACK switch’s (# ) LED will
light up to confirm that recording is in progress.
Press the FH-2’s P/B key momentarily to halt recording; the front panel’s LED will go out.
You may also press the front panel’s P.BACK key
(momentarily) to halt recording, as well.
When the transceiver is turned off, the contents of the
recording memory are erased.
LOCK
ON
OFF
Playback
Press the FH-2’s P/B key momentarily, after recording has been halted, to begin playback of the recorded
audio. The last 15 seconds of audio will be heard in the
speaker or headphones. If you do not intervene, the
entire 15 seconds will be played back, after which the
playback will stop automatically. To halt playback at
any time, just press the P/B key momentarily again.
The next time you press the P.BACK key, it will pick
up the playback where you left off. You may also press
the front panel’s P.BACK key (momentarily) to play
back the recorded audio, as well.
Page 44
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT FEATURES
“MY BANDS” OPERATION
When operating on an Amateur Band on the VFO-A register, it is possible to use the BAND/MHz switch to engage the
use of the CLAR/VFO-B knob for Amateur band selection. The “My Bands” feature allows you to select several Amateur bands, and make only those bands available for selection via the CLAR/VFO-B knob.
This feature can be very useful in a contest, where the 10/18/24 MHz band are not used, or if you do not have antennas for
some bands.
“My Bands” Setup
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to engage the Menu
mode; the Menu list will appear on the LCD.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select
Menu item “TUNING 135 MY BAND.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to choose a
band that you wish to skip (omit) from the band-selection loop (when using the CLAR/VFO-B knob
for band selection). The available choices are 1.8/3.5/
7/10/14/18/21/24/28/50/GEN/TRV, and the factorydefault selection is TRV (only).
4. Press the ENT key (# ) to set the omission command to ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select/deselect as many bands
as you like.
Note
LCD Display
ENT key
MNU key
Main tuning dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
The “ON” command sets the selected band to be skipped, while
the “OFF” command sets the selected band to be included in the
band-selection list.
6. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to
lock in the new configuration and exit to normal operation.
“My Bands” Operation
1. Press the BAND/MHz switch (# ); the imbedded LED will glow Red.
2. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to choose the
Amateur band on which you wish to operate. Only
those Amateur bands that have not been skipped will
appear as you scroll through the bands.
BAND/MHz knob
CLAR/VFO-B knob
1.8MHz
3.5 MHz
7MHz
7MHz
10 MHz
3.5 MHz
14 MHz
7 MHz
18 MHz
14 MHz
21 MHz
21 MHz
24 MHz
28 MHz
3.5MHz
14MHz
21MHz
28MHz
28 MHz
50 MHz
TRV
GEN
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 45
CONVENIENT FEATURES
BAND STACK OPERATION
The FT DX 9000 Contest utilizes a triple band-stack VFO selection technique, that permits you to store up to three favorite
frequencies and modes onto each band's VFO register. For example, you may store one frequency each on 14 MHz CW,
RTTY, and USB, then recall these VFOs by successive, momentary presses of the 14 MHz band key. Each Amateur band
key may similarly have up to three frequency/mode settings applied. Both the VFO-A and VFO-B systems have their own,
independent, band stacks.
A typical setup, for the 14 MHz band, might be arranged
like this:
1. Program 14.0250 MHz, CW Mode, then press the
14 MHz BAND key (# );
2. Program 14.080 MHz, RTTY Mode, then press the
14 MHz BAND key;
3. Program 14.195 MHz, SSB Mode, then press the [14]
MHz BAND key.
With this configuration, successive momentary presses of
the 14 MHz BAND key will allow you to toggle sequentially through these three VFOs.
[BAND] key
BAND
Band Stack1
Key
Frequency (MHz)
1.8
1.800000
3.5
3.500000
5
5.000000
7
7.000000
10
10.100000
14
14.100000
18
18.068000
21
21.000000
24
24.890000
28
28.000000
50
50.000000
GEN
15.000000
Band Stack2
Band Stack3
MODE Frequency (MHz) MODE Frequency (MHz) MODE
CW
1.800000 CW
1.800000
CW
LSB
3.500000 LSB
3.500000
LSB
USB
5.000000 USB
5.000000
USB
LSB
7.000000 LSB
7.000000
LSB
CW
10.100000 CW
10.100000
CW
USB
14.100000 USB
14.100000
USB
USB
18.068000 USB
18.068000
USB
USB
21.000000 USB
21.000000
USB
USB
24.890000 USB
24.890000
USB
USB
28.000000 USB
28.000000
USB
USB
50.000000 USB
50.000000
USB
USB
15.000000 USB
15.000000
USB
C.S (CUSTOM SWITCH)
An often-used Menu mode selection may be brought out to the front panel’s C.S key
C.S Setup
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to engage the Menu
mode; the Menu list will appear on the LCD.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select
the Menu item you want to be able to access via the
C.S key (# ).
3. Press and hold in the C.S key for two seconds to
lock in your selection.
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to
save the new configuration and exit to normal operation.
LCD Display
C.S key
MNU key
Main tuning dial
Menu Selection Recall via [C.S] key
Press the C.S key.
On the LCD, the programmed Menu item will appear. You
may now rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to change
the setting of this menu item. Press the MNU key for
two seconds, when you are done, to save the new configuration and exit to normal operation.
Page 46
C.S key
CLAR/VFO-B knob
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT FEATURES
ROTATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using a YAESU model G-800DXA, G-1000DXA, or G-2800DXA rotator (not supplied), it is possible to control it
from the front panel of the FT DX 9000 Contest.
1. Press and hold in the ENT key (one of the BAND
keys (# )) for two seconds. The frequency display
area will change over to the “Rotator Control” configuration.
2. Press either the 2/3.5 key or the 3/5 key to rotate
the antenna. Pressing the 2/3.5 key will cause rotation to the left (counter-clockwise), while pressing the
3/5 ] key will cause rotation to the right (clockwise).
3. Press the 5/10 key or the 6/14 key to control the
speed of rotation. Pressing the 5/10 key will cause
slower rotation, while pressing the 6/14 key will
speed up rotation. Usually, you will be using the
“100%” setting.
When you are through exercising rotator control, press the
BAND key momentarily. The frequency display will return to the main display field.
Frequency Display
[BAND] key
Counterclockwise
Speed-dwn
Clockwise
Speed-up
Speed (0 ~ 100 %)
+
Direction (0° ~ 360°)
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
“Overlap” indicator
Page 47
CONVENIENT FEATURES
MORE FREQUENCY NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES
Keyboard Frequency Entry
You may enter operating frequencies, for either the VFOA or VFO-B, using the front panel band/frequency selection keys.
Example 1:
Enter 14.250.00 MHz into the VFO-A:
1. Press the A key (# ).
2. Press the ENT key (# ) to engage the direct frequency entry process. Now, beginning with the “10
MHz” digit of the frequency (the leftmost digit), we
will enter the required digits of the frequency.
3. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency,
using the BAND keys (# : which have the frequency-entry digit or decimal point on the right side
of the slash bar). In this example, enter
1/1.8
4/7
./50
2/3.5
5/10
0/28
0/28
0/28
0/28
The decimal point after the “MHz” portion of the frequency must be entered, but no decimal point is required after the “kHz” portion.
4. Press the ENT key once more. A short “beep” will
confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and
the new operating frequency will appear on the VFOA frequency display fields.
Example 2:
Enter 7.100.000 MHz into the VFO-B:
1. Press the B key (# ).
2. Press the ENT key (# ) to engage the direct frequency entry process. Now, beginning with the “10
MHz” digit of the frequency (the leftmost digit), we
will enter the required digits of the frequency to be
entered into the VFO-B register.
3. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency,
using the BAND keys (# : which have the frequency-entry digit or decimal point on the right side
of the slash bar). In this example, enter
7/18
./50
1/1.8
0/28
0/28
0/28
0/28
0/28
4. Press the ENT key once more. A short “beep” will
confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and
the new operating frequency will appear on the VFOA frequency display fields.
Advice
In the above examples, you will notice that the trailing “zero” digits of the frequency were not entered. It
is not necessary to enter these trailing zeroes; just press
the ENT to terminate frequency entry, and they will
be entered automatically.
If you attempt to enter a frequency outside the operating range of 30 kHz ~ 60 MHz, the microprocessor
will ignore the attempt, and you will be returned to
your previous operating frequency. If this happens,
please try again, taking care not to repeat the error in
the frequency entry process.
Page 48
Using the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ), you may
change the VFO-A frequency in 1 MHz steps.
If you first press and hold
in the BAND/MHz
key (# ) for two seconds, the 1 MHz steps
will be applied to the
VFO-B instead. The imbedded LED in the BAND/MHz key will glow Red
in the latter case.
When tuning in 1 MHz steps, clockwise rotation of the
CLAR/VFO-B know will increase the frequency, while
counter-clockwise rotation will decrease the frequency.
Using the UP/DOWN switches of the optional
MD-200A8X Base Station Microphone
The UP/DOWN switches on the
optional MD-200A8X Base Station
Microphone may also be used for
manually scanning upward or
downward in frequency, respectively.
DOWN switche
The microphone’s UP/DOWN
switches utilize the tuning steps of
the Main Tuning Dial
UP switche
knob(# ); moreover, when the
microphone’s [FAST] key is pressed, the tuning rate increases by a factor of ten, in a manner similar to the effect
of the transceiver’s front-panel FAST key (# ).
MODE
LSB, USB,
CW, RTTY,
PKT(LSB)
AM, FM,
PKT(FM)
UP
DWN
FST+UP
FST+DWN
+10 Hz
-10 Hz
+100 Hz
-100 Hz
+5 kHz
-5 kHz
+50 kHz
-50 kHz
Advice
In the Am and FM modes, you may independently set the
tuning steps when using the UP/DOWN switches. To set
new tuning steps, use Menu items “TUNING 132 AM CH
STEP” and “TUNING 133 FM CH STEP.”
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT FEATURES
ANTENNA SELECTION
Four main antenna jacks, available for both transmission and reception, are provided on the rear panel of the transceiver.
What’s more, a receive-only jack is provided, and the incoming signal path may also have a special after-market filter or
preamplifier inserted, if desired, with one-touch access.
Selection of the desired TX/RX antenna is accomplished
by pressing the appropriate 1 ~ 4 Antenna Selection
switch (# ) on the front panel.
ANTENNA SELECT switch
To engage the RX-only antenna, press the RX switch
within the Antenna Selection switch group (# ) on the
front panel. The RX-only antenna must be connected to
the corresponding “RX ANT” antenna jack on the rear
panel.
The antenna currently selected for use on the VFO-A will
be designated by a Red LED.
The antenna currently selected for use on the VFO-B will
be designated by an Orange LED.
If both VFOs are utilizing the same antenna, both the Red
and Orange LEDs will light up on the same antenna location.
ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A )
ANT “1”
TX/RX RELAY
Transmitter
Section
ANT “2”
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A )
ANT “3”
ANT “4”
VFO-A/-B SWITCH
Receiver
Section
RX OUT
(A)
BPF
RX ANT
RX OUT
(B)
ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-B )
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-B )
Page 49
CONVENIENT FEATURES
RECEIVER OPERATION (FRONT END BLOCK DIAGRAM)
The FT DX 9000 Contest includes a wide range of special features to suppress the many types of interference that may be
encountered on the HF bands. However, real world interference conditions are constantly changing, so optimum setting of
the controls is somewhat of an art, requiring familiarity with the types of interference and the subtle effects of some of the
controls. Therefore, the following information is provided as a general guideline for typical situations, and a starting point
for your own experimentation.
We provide the RF -TUNING Unit (Narrow-bandwidth High-Q RF Filter) for the customized option..
VRF (See page 54)
NR (Digital Noise Reduction) (See page 60)
On the HF/50 MHz Amateur bands, Yaesu’s powerful VRF (Variable
RF Filter) preselector circuit provides excellent suppression of out-ofband interference, with a passband much narrower than that provided
by traditional fixed bandpass filters.
The DSP’s Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) feature utilizes sixteen different mathematical algorithms to analyze and suppress different noise
profiles encountered on the HF/50 MHz bands. Choose the selection
that provides the best noise suppression, which concurrently will allow
the signal to rise up out of the noise.
R. FLT (IF Roofing Filters) (See page 55)
D.NOTCH (Digital Notch filter) (See page 62)
Three automatically-selected Roofing filters, in bandwidths of 15 kHz,
6 kHz, and 3 kHz, are provided in the 40 MHz First IF, right after the
first mixer. These filters provide narrow-band selectivity to protect the
following IF and DSP stages, and the filters’ automatically-selected bandwidths may be manually changed by the operator, if desired, for special
operating circumstances.
When multiple interfering carriers are encountered during reception, the
Digital Notch Filter can significantly reduce the level of these signals.
AGC (See page 63)
The AGC system is highly adaptable to changing signal and fading characteristics, making reception possible under the most difficult conditions.
CONTOUR Filter (See page 56)
The Contour filter is a unique capability of the FT DX 9000 Contest,
providing either nulling or peaking of tunable segments of the receiver
passband, so as to suppress interference or excessive frequency components on an incoming signal, or to peak those tunable frequency segments. The amount of nulling/peaking, and the bandwidth over which
it is applied, are adjustable via the Menu.
SLOPED AGC (See page 64)
The Sloped AGC system, instead of clamping a fixed upper bound on
audio output across a wide range of input signals, actually allows the
audio output to rise, very gently, with ever-increasing signal strength.
This capability allows you to separate signals, using your brain, according to signal strength in addition to slight frequency differences.
IF SHIFT (See page 57)
IF Filter Quality Adjustment (See page 124)
The passband center frequency response of the IF DSP filtering may be
adjusted using this control.
The “Q” (quality factor) of the IF DSP filters may be adjusted independently for the IF DSP filters, using the Menu.
IF WIDTH (See page 58)
Variable IF Filter Shape Factor (See page 124)
The width of the IF DSP filtering may be carried using this control.
You may adjust the shape factor of the IF DSP filters, using the Menu.
IF NOTCH (See page 59)
The IF Notch filter is a high-Q notch filter that can significantly reduce,
if not eliminate, an interfering carrier. The Q (sharpness) of the filter
may be adjusted using the Menu.
Main Band (VFO-A)
RF
ANTENNA SELECTOR
1st
IF AMP
RF AMP
1st Local
VRF
3k/6k/15k
2nd
IF AMP
CF
2nd Local
DSP
UNIT
3rd Local
Sub Band (VFO-B)
RF
1st IF
40.450 MHz
OPTION
BPF
3rd IF (DSP)
30 kHz
2nd IF
450 kHz
ROOFING
FILTER
IPO “OFF”
VRF
Page 50
BPF
3rd IF (DSP)
30 kHz
2nd IF
455 kHz
ROOFING
FILTER
IPO “OFF”
OPTION
µ-TUNE
1st IF
40.455 MHz
1st
IF AMP
RF AMP
1st Local
3k/6k/15k
CF
2nd Local
2nd
IF AMP
DSP
UNIT
3rd Local
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT FEATURES
IPO (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION)
Normally, the front-end FET RF amplifiers provide maximum sensitivity for weak signals. During typical conditions on lower frequencies (where strong signals and high noise are common), the RF amplifiers can be bypassed by pressing the IPO button so that the
button’s illumination is lit. This improves the IMD (intermodulation distortion) rejection characteristics of the receiver, with only a
slight reduction of sensitivity. On frequencies below about 10 MHz, you generally will want to keep the IPO button engaged at all times,
as the preamplifiers are usually not needed at these frequencies unless you are using a Beverage or other lossy receive antenna.
Quick Note
The FT DX 9000 Contest’s first mixer is an active type, using four SST310 Junction FETs. This mixer design provides gain to the
receiver chain, so the noise figure of the receiver is fundamentally lower than with some other designs. Therefore, it frequently
is not necessary to utilize the RF preamplifier, and the receiver Intercept Point will be substantially increased by engaging IPO,
so as to feed the incoming signals directly to the first (active) mixer. We recommend that IPO be switched on whenever possible.
VFO-A IPO Setup
Press the VFO-A side’s
-IPO switch key (# ) to
engage the IPO on the VFO-A.
A Red LED imbedded in the switch will light up, and the
preamplifier for the VFO-A will be bypassed. The system
gain and sensitivity will be reduced.
To cancel IPO operation and restore full system gain and
sensitivity, press the
-IPO switch key once more.
VFO-B IPO Setup
-IPO switch key (# ) to
Press the VFO-B side’s
engage the IPO on the VFO-B.
An Orange LED imbedded in the switch will light up, and
the preamplifier for the VFO-B will be bypassed. The system gain and sensitivity will be reduced.
To cancel IPO operation and restore full system gain and
sensitivity, press the
-IPO switch key once more.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
VFO-A
-IPO switch
VFO-B
-IPO switch
Page 51
CONVENIENT FEATURES
ATT
Even with the IPO function on, extremely strong local signals or high noise can still degrade reception. In such situations,
you can use the ATT switch to insert 3, 6, 12, or 18-dB of RF attenuation in front of the RF amplifier.
Rotate the ATT switch (# ) to set the desired attenuation level, per the chart below.
To restore full signal strength through the Attenuator circuit area, set the ATT switch to the “0” position.
ATT switch
0 dB
3 dB
Attenuator is Off
The incoming signal power is reduced by 3 dB (signal voltage reduced by 1/1.4)
6 dB The incoming signal power is reduced by 6 dB (signal voltage reduced by 1/2)
12 dB The incoming signal power is reduced by 12 dB (signal voltage reduced by 1/4)
18 dB The incoming signal power is reduced by 18 dB (signal voltage reduced by 1/8)
Advice
If background noise causes the S-meter to deflect on clear
frequencies, turn the ATT knob clockwise until the Smeter drops to about “S-1.” This setting optimizes the
trade-offs between sensitivity, noise, and interference immunity. Also, once you have tuned in a station you want to
work, you may want to reduce sensitivity further (or add
more attenuation) by turning the ATT knob to a more
clockwise setting. This reduces the strength of all signals
(and noise) and can make reception more comfortable, important especially during long QSOs.
When looking for weak signals on a quiet band, you will
want maximum sensitivity, so the IPO should be disabled
and the ATT knob should be set to “0.” This situation is
typical during quiet times on frequencies above 21 MHz,
and when using a small or negative-gain receiving antenna
on other bands.
Page 52
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT FEATURES
RF GAIN (SSB/CW/AM MODES)
The RF Gain controls provide manual adjustment of the gain levels for the receiver RF and IF stages, to account for noise
and/or signal strength conditions at the moment.
The RF GAIN control (# ) should, initially, be rotated to the fully clockwise position. This is the point of
maximum sensitivity, and counter-clockwise rotation will
gradually reduce the system gain.
P As the RF GAIN control is rotated counterclockwise to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will rise.
This indicates that the AGC voltage being applied to
the receiver (to reduce the gain) is increasing.
P Rotating the RF GAIN control to the fully counterclockwise position will essentially disable the receiver,
as the gain will be greatly reduced. In this case, as well,
the S-meter will appear to be “pegged” against the right
edge of the analog S-meter scale.
RF GAIN Knob
Advice
Reception frequently can be optimized by rotating the RF
Gain control slightly counter-clockwise to the point where
the incoming noise level is just about the same as the “stationary” meter needle position as set by the adjustment of
the RF GAIN control. This setting ensures that excessive gain is not being utilized, without so much gain reduction that incoming signals cannot be heard.
Quick Point
The RF GAIN control, along with the IPO and Attenuator features, all affect the system receiver gain in different ways. As a first step in dealing with high noise or a
crowded, high-level signal environment, the IPO generally should be the first feature engaged, if the frequency is
low enough to allow the preamplifier to be bypassed.
Thereafter, the RF Gain and Attenuator features may be
employed to provide precise, delicate adjustment of the
receiver gain so as to optimize performance fully.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 53
ADVANCED INTERFERENCE-SUPPRESSION FEATURES: RF FRONT END
USING THE VRF (VARIABLE RF FRONT-END FILTER)
The VRF system is a high-performance RF front-end preselector that provides outstanding rejection of out-of-band signals.
1. Press the VRF/μ switch (# ) momentarily. The
LED inside the switch will become illuminated, and
the VRF system will be engaged, centered on your
current Amateur band.
2. You may rotate the VRF/μ knob (# ) to skew the
position of the VRF system relative to your operating
frequency. Because the VRF system is relatively broad,
although still much narrower than the fixed bandpass
filter), you may not hear much difference in the background noise or signal quality when you make minor
adjustments. However, if you have receiving problems
associated by a very strong signal, rotation of the
VRF/μ knob may help reduce the strength of the
interfering station, allowing improved reception of the
desired signal.
VRF/μ knob
VRF/μ switch
After moving the passband of the VRF system manually, you
may re-center it on the current Amateur band by pressing and
holding in the VRF/μ switch for two seconds.
To switch VRF off, press the VRF/μ switch momentarily
again. The LED imbedded in the switch will go out, and the
VRF circuit will be removed from the incoming received signal path.
Quick Point
The VRF filter, utilizing high-quality coils and capacitors
that provide high Q, yields a passband that is approximately
20% to 30% the width of a traditional, fixed bandpass filter. As a result, significantly more unwanted signal rejection is provided. Within each Amateur band, 64 adjustment steps are provided (50 MHz: 8 steps), if you wish to
skew the response in a particular direction so as to enhance interference rejection even more.
Page 54
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS OFF FREQUENCY BY JUST A FEW KHZ)
ROOFING (ROOFING FILTERS)
Narrow-band Roofing Filters of 15 kHz, 6 kHz, and 3 kHz bandwidths are provided in the first IF, right after the first mixer.
These filters provide protection for the 2nd mixer, DSP, and other circuitry that follow, and can dramatically improve
reception on a very crowded band (during a contest, etc.). Typically, the AUTO selection mode is satisfactory for most
operating situations, but in an extremely crowded phone band you may wish to select, for example, the 3 kHz roofing filter
for SSB operation.
Press the ROOFING switch (# ) to toggle the Roofing Filter selection.
AUTO 15 kHz 6 kHz 3 kHz AUTO
ROOFING switch
Roofing Filter bandwidth will be
indicated on the LCD
As you repeatedly press this switch, you will observe different LEDs
lighting up in the Roofing Filter area of the front panel, denoting the
Roofing Filter currently in use.
Typically, this selection will be set to “AUTO.”
The Roofing Filter selection will be memorized independently on
each VFO in the VFO stack.
Quick Point
The “AUTO” selection of the Roofing Filter is based
on the operating mode. However, you may override
the automatic selection, if band conditions warrant a
different (usually, a tighter) selection.
The AUTO mode Roofing Filter selections are shown
below:
AM/FM/FM-PKT
LSB/USB/PKT
CW/RTTY
15 kHz
6 kHz
3 kHz
Roofing Filter bandwidth
will be indicated
When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and
the Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter
bandwidth will automatically be set to 15 kHz, as this
setting provides the most effective noise blanking.
However, you still may override the automatic setting, and select a more narrow Roofing Filter. Noise
blanking may be compromised, however, with a tighter
Roofing Filter in the line.
Terminology
A “Roofing Filter,” as its name implies, places a “Roof” over the receiver’s IF system bandwidth. This “Roof” protects the
circuitry downstream from the first mixer from interference, just as a roof on a house protects the contents from rain and
snow.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 55
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
CONTOUR CONTROL OPERATION
The Contour filtering system provides a gentle perturbation of the IF filter passband, so as to suppress or enhance certain
frequency components modestly, so as to enhance the natural-sounding received signal.
1. Press the CONT switch (# ). The LED imbedded in the switch will glow Red to confirm that the
Contour filter is engaged.
2. Rotate the CONTOUR knob (# ) to achieve the
most natural-sounding audio reproduction on the incoming signal. To cancel Contour tuning, press the
CONT switch once more.
CONTOUR knob
Advice
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed,
you may use the Audio Scope on the Audio Scope/
Oscilloscope page on the TFT to help you adjust the
setting of the Contour control for the optimum performance. The effect of the Contour filter adjustments
within the Audio Scope passband will be easy to see
on the Audio Scope.
The Width of the Contour filter effect, and the degree
of nulling or peaking, may be adjusted using the menu.
The Contour filter’s level (either nulling or peaking) may be
adjusted using Menu Item “RX DSP 078 MAIN-CONTOURLEVEL.” The factory default setting is –15.
The bandwidth over which the Contour filter effect is applied
may be adjusted using Menu Item “RX DSP 079 MAINCONTOUR-WIDTH.” The factory default setting is 10.
With reference to Figure (B), note the initial position (12 o’clock) of
the CONTOUR control when the CONT switch is pushed. You
CONT switch
Quick Point
The steep slopes of the DSP filtering can, when adjusted
aggressively, impart an unnatural sound to an incoming
signal. Oftentimes, though, a narrow bandwidth is not the
key to improving copy; the incoming signal itself may have
undesirable or excessive frequency components, especially
in the low-frequency range around 400 Hz. By judicious
use of the Contour filter, the “shoulder” of the passband
response may be altered, or components removed from
within the passband, allowing the desired signal to rise
above the background noise and interference in a manner
not obtainable with other filtering systems.
A
B
C
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
may observe the "indentation" in the receiver passband where the
Contour filter is placing a low-Q “notch” (per the setting of Menu
#078, referenced above). Counter-clockwise rotation (to the left) of
the Contour knob causes the indentation to move toward a lower
frequency within the passband, while clockwise rotation (to the right)
causes the indentation to move toward a higher frequency within
the passband. By removing interference or unwanted frequency components on the incoming signal, it is possible to make the desired
signal rise out of the background noise/interference, enhancing intelligibility.
Page 56
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
IF SHIFT OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES)
IF Shift allows you to vary the DSP filter passband higher or lower, without changing the pitch of the incoming signal, so as
to reduce or eliminate interference. Because the carrier tuning frequency is not varied, there is no need to re-tune the
operating frequency when eliminating the interference. The total passband tuning range for the IF Shift system is ± 1 kHz.
Rotate the SHIFT (#
reduce the interference.
) control to the left or right to
IF Shift system may be
observed on the LCD
Advice
The position of the IF Shift system may be observed on
the LCD.
SHIFT knob
IF Shift system may be
observed
Referring to Figure (A), note the depiction of the
IF DSP filter as the thick line, with the SHIFT
A
Desired Signal
control in the 12 o’clock position. In Figure (B),
B
Desired Signal
C
QRM
an interfering signal has appeared inside the origi-
QRM
nal passband. In Figure (C), you can see the effect
of rotating the SHIFT control so as to reduce
IF BANDWIDTH
IF BANDWIDTH
IF BANDWIDTH
the interference level by moving the filter passband so that the interference is outside of the passband.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 57
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
WIDTH (IF DSP BANDWIDTH) TUNING (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES)
The IF Width tuning system allows you to vary the width of the DSP IF passband, so as to eliminate interference. Moreover,
the bandwidth may actually be expanded from its default setting, should you wish to enhance incoming signal fidelity when
interference on the band is low.
WIDTH system may be
observed on the LCD
Rotate the WIDTH knob (# ) to adjust the bandwidth.
Counter-clockwise rotation reduces the bandwidth, while
clockwise rotation increases the bandwidth.
By rotating the WIDTH knob to the left, the bandwidth will
narrow (see Figure (A)), while rotation of the WIDTH knob to
the right, as depicted in Figure (C), will widen the bandwidth.
The default bandwidths, and total bandwidth adjustment range,
will vary according to the operating mode:
WIDTH knob
SSB Mode
200 Hz ~ 4.0 kHz (bandwidth at 12 o’clock position of WIDTH :
2.4 kHz).
CW/RTTY/PKT Modes
25 Hz ~ 2.4 kHz (bandwidth at 12 o’clock position of WIDTH :
500 Hz).
A
B
C
IF BANDWIDTH
IF BANDWIDTH
IF BANDWIDTH
WIDTH system may be
observed on the LCD
Advice
You may observe the effects of adjustment of the
WIDTH control on the LCD.
Using IF Shift and Width Together
The IF Shift and Variable IF Width features together form a very effective interference-fighting filtering system.
For example, in Figure (A) you can see how interference has appeared both on the high and low sides of the desired signal. By rotating the WIDTH control, as shown in Figure (B), the interference from one side can be eliminated, and by re-positioning the
SHIFT control (Figure (C)), the interference on the opposite side
can be removed, without re-introducing the interference previously
eliminated in Figure (B).
Advice
For best interference reduction, the Width and Shift features are the
primary tools you should use. After narrowing the bandwidth (Width)
and/or adjusting the center of the passband (Shift), the Contour control may also yield additional signal-enhancement benefits on the
net residual bandwidth. What’s more, the IF Notch Filter (see the
next section) may also be utilized, in conjunction with the three
other filter systems, to significant advantage.
Page 58
C
B
A
Desired Signal
QRM
QRM
QRM
IF BANDWIDTH
QRM
IF BANDWIDTH
QRM
QRM
IF BANDWIDTH
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
IF NOTCH FILTER OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES)
The IF Notch filter is a highly-effective system that allows you to slice out an interfering beat note or other carrier signal
from inside the receiver passband.
1. Press the NOTCH switch (# ). The LED imbedded in the switch will glow Red to confirm that the IF
Notch filter has been engaged.
2. Rotate the NOTCH knob (# ) to null out the interfering carrier.
To switch the IF Notch filter off, press the NOTCH
switch once more. The LED imbedded in the switch will
turn off, confirming that the IF Notch filter is no longer
operating.
Advice
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed,
you may use the Audio Scope on the Audio Scope/
Oscilloscope page on the TFT to help you adjust the
setting of the Notch filter control for the optimum
performance. The effect of the Notch filter adjustments
will be easy to see on the Audio Scope.
The width of the IF Notch null may be adjusted using
Menu Item “RX DSP 082 IF-NOTCH-WIDTH.”
Both “Wide” and “Narrow” selections are available,
with “Narrow” providing the least disruption of the
“desired” signal.
Under the frequency display, you may also use the
Bar Display to show the position of the IF Notch. Use
Menu Item “DISPLAY 016 BAR DISPLAY SELECT” to engage this function.
The performance of the IF Notch filter is shown in Figure (A), where the effect of rotation of the NOTCH
knob is depicted. In Figure (B) you can see the notching effect of the IF Notch filter as you rotate the
NOTCH knob to eliminate the incoming interference.
NOTCH knob
NOTCH switch
Note
When the NOTCH switch is pressed and held in for two
seconds, the center of the notch action will be reset to the
positions described below (mode-sensitive):
SSB/AM: The Notch will center at 1.5 kHz (center of
the receiver passband).
CW:
The Notch will center on the frequency
programmed by the PITCH knob (# ).
NOTCH
IF BANDWIDTH
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
B
A
QRM (Heterodyne)
Desired Signal
IF BANDWIDTH
Page 59
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION (NR) OPERATION
The Digital Noise Reduction (NR) system is designed to reduce the level of random noise found on the HF and 50 MHz
bands, and it is especially effective during SSB operation. By rotating the NR knob, any of sixteen different noisereduction algorithms can be selected; each of these algorithms was create for dealing with a different noise profile, and you
will want to experiment with the NR system to find the best setting according to the noise currently being experienced.
1. Press the NR switch (# ). The LED imbedded in
the switch will glow Red, confirming that the DNR
system is engaged.
2. Rotate the NR knob (# ) to select the setting that
most effectively reduces the noise level.
To disable the NR system, press the NR switch once more.
The imbedded LED will turn off, confirming that the NR
system is not active.
Page 60
NR knob
NR switch
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
NARROW (NAR) ONE-TOUCH IF FILTER SELECTION
Pressing the NAR switch (# ) provides one-touch, mode-specific selection of a narrow IF DSP filter setting that does
not depend on the setting of the Width control. Pressing the NAR switch once more returns the bandwidth control to the
Width/Shift system. The factory default bandwidths are:
SSB Mode
Pressing the NAR switch selects a bandwidth of 1.8 kHz.
WIDTH (BW) “NAR” may be
observed on theLCD
CW/RTTY/PKT Modes
Pressing the NAR switch selects a bandwidth of 300 Hz.
AM Mode
Pressing the NAR switch selects a bandwidth of 6 kHz.
FM Mode (28/50 MHz Bands)
Pressing the NAR switch selects a bandwidth of 9 kHz.
Advice
The bandwidth applied when the NAR switch is
pressed may be adjusted using the Menu. This allows
you to customize a quick-switch “Narrow” bandwidth
matching your operating needs (in examples below,
the default setting is underlined).
SSB
Main (VFO-A)
RX DSP 094 MAIN-SSB-NARROW
200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/
1650/1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz
Sub (VFO-B)
RX DSP 106 SUB-SSB-NARROW
200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/
1650/1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz
CW
Main (VFO-A)
RX DSP 085 MAIN-CW-NARROW
25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Sub (VFO-B)
RX DSP 097 SUB-CW-NARROW
25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
PSK
Main (VFO-A)
RX DSP 088 MAIN-PSK-NARROW
25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Sub (VFO-B)
RX DSP 100 SUB-PSK-NARROW
25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
RTTY
Main (VFO-A)
RX DSP 91 MAIN-RTTY-NARROW
25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Sub (VFO-B)
RX DSP 103 SUB-RTTY-NARROW
25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
NAR switch
WIDTH (BW) “NAR” may
be observed on the LCD
Advice
When the NAR button has been pushed so as to
engaged the narrow filter, the Width control will be
disabled, but IF Shift still is operational. For many
applications, you may find that simple adjustment of
the WIDTH control (# ), instead of engaging the
Narrow filter, may be satisfactory for interference reduction.
When you press the NAR button in the FM mode,
both the transmit and receive bandwidths are narrowed.
Note
When the NAR button is pressed, the WIDTH control no longer functions.
Page 61
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER (D.NOTCH) OPERATION
The Digital Notch Filter (D.NOTCH) is an effective beat-cancelling filter that can null out a number of interfering beat
notes inside the receiver passband. Because this is an Auto-Notch feature, there is no adjustment knob associated with this
filter.
Advice
If a very strong interfering carrier is encountered, we recommend you first use the IF Notch filter, as it is the most effective
notching tool in the receiver section.
Press the D.NOTCH switch (# ) to engage the Digital
Notch filter. The LED imbedded in the switch will glow Red,
to confirm that the DNF circuit is engaged.
To cancel D.NOTCH operation, press the D.NOTCH
switch once more. The imbedded LED will go out, confirming that the Digital Notch Filter is no longer in operation.
D.NOTCH switch
IF NOISE BLANKER (NB) OPERATION
The FT DX 9000 Contest includes an effective IF Noise Blanker, which can significantly reduce noise caused by automotive
ignition systems.
1. Press the VFO-A NB switch (# ) momentarily to
reduce a short pulse noise such as from switching transients, automobile ignitions and power lines. The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Red to confirm that
the Narrow-NB is operating.
Press and hold the VFO-A NB switch for two seconds to reduce a longer duration man-made pulse
noise. The LED imbedded in the switch will glow
Yellow to confirm that the Wide-NB is operating.
2. Advance the VFO-A NB control (# ) to the point
where the offending ignition noise is best reduced or
eliminated.
NB knob
NB switch
To end Noise Blanker operation, press the NB switch
once more. The LED imbedded in the switch will turn off,
confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer in operation.
Advice
When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and the
Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter bandwidth
will automatically be set to 15 kHz.
Page 62
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
The AGC system is designed to help compensate for fading and other propagation effects, with characteristics that can be
of particular value on each operating mode. The basic objective of AGC is to maintain a constant audio output level once
a certain minimum threshold of signal strength is achieved.
Rotate the AGC switch (# ) to select the desired receiver-recovery time constant. For most operation, we recommend the “AUTO” mode.
AGC switch
Rotation of the AGC switch allows selection of the desired receiver-recovery time constant. Normally, the
“AUTO” selection is satisfactory for most situations, but
in the event of operation on a crowded band where you
wish to receive a weak signal, you may wish to change the
setting (to FAST, for example). The AUTO mode selections are:
Operation Mode
LSB
USB
CW
AM
FM
RTTY
PKT(FM)
PKT(LSB)
AUTO AGC Selection
SLOW
SLOW
FAST
FAST
FAST
SLOW
FAST
SLOW
Advice
If the AGC switch is set to the “Off” position, the Smeter will no longer deflect. Additionally, you will likely
encounter distortion on stronger signals, as the IF amplifiers and the following stages are probably being overloaded.
Quick Point
Several aspects of AGC performance may be configured
via the Menu. However, because AGC can have such a
profound impact on overall receiver performance, we generally do not recommend any changes to the AGC Menu
selections.
Terminology
Automatic Gain Control, or AGC, is a circuit that senses the incoming signal strength, and then limits the gains of the RF
and IF stages so as to keep the output audio volume at a more-or-less constant level. AGC also protects the RF, IF, Audio,
and DSP stages from overload, as it limits the signal strength that is allowed to flow, irrespective of the input signal level.
SLOPED AGC Operation
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 63
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
action is reached (usually several dozen dB above the
no-signal noise floor). The FT DX 9000 Contest, however, includes an innovative Sloped AGC system, that
allows the audio volume to rise and fall slightly according to signal strength. Although the rise/fall are not dramatic, they are sufficient to allow you to use your ear to
discern and separate signals according to signal strength,
not just audio frequency.
Using Sloped AGC
1. To the bottom right side of the LCD, press the
MNU (Menu) key (# ) momentarily to enter
the Menu mode; the Menu will appear on the LCD.
2. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select
Menu Item “RX AUDIO 075 AGC-SLOPE.
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to change
the setting to “SLOPE.”
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. You will now be using the Sloped AGC system.
Page 64
Audio Output
In traditional AGC systems, the audio output from the transceiver becomes essentially fixed once the threshold for AGC
SLOPE
NORMAL
Input Signal
MNU key
Main tuning dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
AUDIO LIMITER (AFL) FEATURE
Particularly when the AGC is off, you may desire to limit the level of audio output that is permitted to flow to the speaker
or earphones. For these circumstances, the AFL (Audio Limiter) feature will provide the desired cap on the audio output.
Press the AFL switch (# ) to turn on the Audio Limiter. The imbedded LED in the button will glow red. To
disable the Audio limiter, press the AFL switch once
more; the imbedded LED will turn off.
Advice
Because the AFL feature will generally reduce the overall
audio level, we recommend that it be left Off unless special operating conditions warrant its use.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
AFL switch
Page 65
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
1. The operating mode is selected
using the MODE switches
(# ) to the left of the Main
Tuning Dial knob (# ), and the
VFO (A or B) to which the selection is applied is selected by
pressing the A or B switch
above the Mode keys. Press the
A or B key to select the desired VFO, then press the LSB
or USB key to select one of the
SSB modes. For AM operation, press the AM key.
MOX switch
VOX switch
MODE switch
Main Tuning Dial
METER switch
MIC knob
RF/PWR knob
Please adjust the MIC gain control to set the ALC within this range.
Quick Point
By convention, LSB is used in the 7 MHz and lower Amateur
bands for SSB communication, and USB is used on the 14 MHz
and higher bands (the 10 MHz band is used for CW and data modes
only).
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the
operating frequency. Alternatively, if using the optional
MD-200A8X Desktop Microphone, you may use the
Up/Down scanning buttons to sweep up or down the
current band.
Advice
Be sure to verify that the microphone you are using is enabled for
operation via the Menu. There are two microphone jacks (the front
panel's three-pin XLR (“Cannon”) connector, and the rear panel’s
8-pin round connector), and either jack may be chosen independently for SSB, AM, and FM operation. See the Menu list below
for details of the associated Menu Item:
3. Press the microphone’s PTT (Push To Talk) switch to
begin transmission; speak into the microphone in a
normal voice level.
The “TX” indicator will light up in the frequency display area,
confirming that transmission is in progress.
When transmitting in the AM mode, rotate the RF PWR
control (# ) so as to set a maximum (carrier) power output
of 50 Watts.
Release the PTT switch at the end of your transmission. The
transceiver will return to the receive mode.
4. To adjust the microphone amplifier gain to match the
microphone and your voice
level, close the PTT switch,
speak into the microphone in
a normal voice level, and adjust the MIC (gain) control
(# ) as follows:
SSB Mode
Adjust the MIC control so that the ALC voltage
(displayed on the right meter) stays within the ALC
zone of the meter (up to 2/3 or full scale deflection)
on voice peaks.
For AM, the MIC control should not be advanced
to the point where the ALC meter deflects. In many
cases, the same setting as used on SSB will be satisfactory.
Page 66
Advice
ALC meter deflection may be caused by excessive
drive power, but also by reflected power detected in
the antenna system. If the impedance presented to the
transceiver is different from 50 Ohms, ALC meter
action may be observed that is not related to the proper
setting of the MIC gain control. Therefore, we recommend that you make MIC gian adjustments into
a dummy load or antenna system presenting an impedance very close to 50 Ohms.
Rotate the RF PWR control to
set the desired power output.
Clockwise rotation of the RF
PWR control will increase the
power. The adjustment range is
between 5 Watts and 200 Watts, and you should always use the minimum power necessary for maintaining reliable communications.
When performing tests (such as the setup of the MIC
or RF PWR controls), be sure to check the frequency
before transmitting, so as to avoid interference to others who may already be using the frequency.
Four techniques for exercising Transmit/Receive control are provided on the FT DX 9000 Contest, and you
may choose the technique(s) that best suit your operating needs:
Pressing the microphone’s PTT switch will engage the transmitter.
The rear panel PTT jack may be connected to a foot switch or
other manual switching device in order to engage the transmitter.
PTT jack
Pressing the front panel MOX switch (# ) will
lock the transmitter on. Press the MOX switch
( a latching type) to return to receive.
The VOX (Voice Operated Xmit) circuit will engage the transmitter automatically when you speak
into the microphone. For details of VOX operation, see page 80.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
PHANTOM VOLTAGE FOR CONDENSER MICROPHONES
For powering a studio-quality condenser microphone connected to the front panel’s XLR (“Cannon”) connector, it is
possible to enable a 48-volt DC line connected to that jack. Because the improper enabling of this voltage could cause
damage to other microphone types, the simple process for enabling the voltage has been made somewhat complicated, so as
to prevent the voltage from being enabled by accident.
1. Turn the front and rear panel power switches Off.
2. Unplug the AC cable from the rear panel AC IN
jack.
3. Referring to Figure 1, remove the eight screws from
the sides of the transceiver case.
4. Now remove the six screws shown in Figure 1 from
the bottom case.
5. Referring to Figure 2, locate jack J28 on the AF Unit,
and remove the jumper plug which is connected across
pins 2 and 3 of J28.
6. Connect the just-removed jumper plug so that it now
is connected across pins 1 and 2 of J28 (instead of the
original position across pins 2 and 3).
7. Replace the six screws to affix the bottom case, and
replace the eight screws from the sides of the transceiver (these screws were removed in steps 3 and 4
above).
8. Connect the AC cable to the rear panel’s AC IN jack.
9. Turn the rear panel’s power switch on, then turn the
front panel power switch on.
10. If the above process has been successfully completed,
you will observe that a small red LED just above and
to the right of the XLR connector is now illuminated.
If this LED is not glowing red, please check the status
of the jumper plug once more.
11. If the red LED is glowing properly, the modification
to enable the phantom 48 Volt line is now complete.
Note
When opening/closing the case, take care with your
screwdriver not to short out internal components, or
touch them in a way that will cause them to short
out against other components.
Avoid touching internal components with your hand,
as static electricity can cause damage to certain components if appropriate anti-static bench techniques
are employed.
Only engage the phantom power when you have no
alternative but to use a condenser microphone requiring such voltage. The wide availability of studio-grade Dynamic microphones (that do not require
the phantom voltage) generally makes the use of the
phantom voltage unnecessary over the life of the
transceiver. Because damage can occur if the phantom voltage is enabled on a microphone not requiring it, we strongly recommend that the jumper plug
at J28 (AF Unit) be left in its original position across
pins 2 and 3.
The phantom voltage capability of the FT DX 9000
Contest is disabled at the factory, and the lack of
this voltage is not a “defect” or other condition covered by the Limited Warranty on this product. Accordingly, if you do not feel capable of enabling the
phantom voltage and ask a service shop to do so on
your behalf, a service fee may apply.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Jumper Plug
(Inside the Transceiver)
Figure 1
48-volt Supply Line
Move
Disable
Enable
Figure 2
Terminology
Phantom Voltage
Phantom Voltage is a term describing the voltage (48 Volts
at 10 mA max.) provided via the front panel’s XLR (“Cannon”) microphone connector, for use with a studio-grade
condenser microphone. Although disabled at the factory,
enabling of the voltage only requires that the position of
an internal jumper plug be moved.
Page 67
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
The Automatic Antenna Tuner (hereinafter referred to as the “ATU”) built into each FT DX 9000 Contest is crafted to ensure
a 50-Ohm load for the final amplifier stage of the transmitter. We recommend that the ATU be used whenever you operate
on the FT DX 9000 Contest.
Advice
The ATU of the FT DX 9000 Contest, being located inside the station, only adjusts the impedance presented to the
transceiver at the station end of your coaxial cable feedline. It does not “tune” the SWR at the antenna feedpoint itself.
When designing and building your antenna system, we recommend that every effort be made to ensure a low SWR at
the antenna feedpoint.
The ATU of the FT DX 9000 Contest includes 100 memories for tuning data. Eleven of these memories are allocated,
one per Amateur band, so that each band has at least one setting preset for use on that band. The remaining 89 memories
are reserved for the 89 most-recent tuning points, for quick frequency change without the need to retune the ATU.
The ATU in the FT DX 9000 Contest is designed to match impedances within the range of 16.5 Ohms to 150 Ohms,
corresponding to an SWR of 3:1 or less. Accordingly, simple non-resonant whip antennas, along with random-length
wires and the “G5RV” antenna (on most bands) may not be within the impedance matching range of the ATU.
ATU OPERATION
1. Rotate the RF PWR control (# ) fully clockwise
(to the right).
2. Use the MAIN Tuning Dial knob (# ) to set the
radio to desired operating frequency within the Amateur band.
3. Press the TUNE switch (# ) momentarily to place
the ATU in the transmit line (no adjustment/tuning will
occur yet). An LED inside the TUNE switch will
glow red continuously.
Quick Point
The momentary press of the TUNE switch will turn
the tuner on, and the microprocessor will automatically select the tuning point closest to the current operating frequency.
4. Press and hold in the TUNE switch for two seconds to begin automatic tuning. The transmitter will
be engaged, and the red LED imbedded in the TUNE
switch will blink while tuning is in progress. When
the optimum tuning point has been reached, the radio
will return to receive, and the red LED will again glow
steadily (instead of blinking).
5. While tuning around the band using the Main tuning
dial, you will observe that the TUNE LED blinks
momentarily every 10 kHz. This momentary blinking
indicates that a new tuning window has been entered.
If you want to save tuning data associated with this 10
kHz window, repeat step 4 (above) for each such window. On bands like 1.8 MHz where the impedance
may change rapidly, the storage of a number of tuning
points is recommended.
6. To disconnect the ATU from the transmit line, press
the TUNE switch momentarily. The red LED imbedded in the TUNE switch will go out, confirming that the ATU has been turned off. In the “Off”
mode, the transceiver will be directly connected to
the coaxial cable connected to your antenna, and will
operate based on whatever impedance is present at
the station end of the coax.
TUNE switch
“HI-SWR”
(LED glows Red)
Main Tuning Dial
RF PWR knob
Advice
The ATU is connected both to the transmitter and the receiver, and its natural RF selectivity has a beneficial effect
in rejecting out-of-band energy during reception. Accordingly, we recommend that the ATU be left “On” at all times.
Quick Point
As shipped from the factory, only one ATU alignment
point is saved on each Amateur band. This was memorized during the final alignment and performance verification stages on the production line.
The momentary flickering of the TUNE switch’s
LED occurs whenever you cross over into a new 10
kHz ATU memory window.
Note
Although transmitter power is decreased to 100 Watts
(maximum) during tuning, by all means please check the
operating frequency before beginning the tuning process,
to be sure you are not interfering with others who may
already be using the frequency.
Terminology
Antenna Tuner Memories
The microprocessor of the ATU makes a note of the positions of the tuning capacitors and the selected inductors, and stores
the data for each 10 kHz window in which tuning has occurred. This eliminates the need to re-tune every time you return to
a frequency on which you already have completed the tuning process.
Page 68
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
ABOUT ATU OPERATION
Figure 1 depicts a situation where normal tuning via the ATU has been successfully completed, and the tuning data has been
stored in the ATU memory. The antenna system as seen by the transmitter is shown.
In Figure 2, the operator has changed frequency, and the HI SWR LED has become illuminated. The operator presses and
holds in the TUNE switch for two seconds to begin impedance matching using the ATU.
If a high SWR conditions exists (above 3:1), corrective action must be taken in the antenna system to bring the impedance
closer to 50 Ohms. Besides the fact that the ATU will refuse to memorize settings on frequencies where the SWR exceeds
3:1, the high SWR may indicate a mechanical failure in the feed system, and such failures can lead to the generation of
spurious signals causing TVI, etc.
SWR = 2.0
Ë
Feed Point SWR
SWR = 1.5
SWR = 1.0
Frequency
SWR Seen by ATU
SWR after ATU Tuning
Figure 1
Memorized ATU
SWRSetting
SWR = 3.0
Ë
SWR = 2.0
Ë
Retuned Setting
Retunig
SWR = 1.0
Frequency
①
②
Figure 2
About ATU Memories
SWR (Post-tuning) Less than 1.5:1
The tuning settings are committed to the ATU memory.
SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 1.5:1
Tuning data will not be retained in memory. If you return to the same frequency, the tuning process must be repeated.
SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 3:1
The HI SWR LED will light up, and tuning settings, if achieved, will not be memorized. Please investigate and
resolve the high SWR condition before attempting further operation using this antenna. The high SWR may indicate
a mechanical failure in the feed system, and such failures can lead to the generation of spurious signals causing TVI,
etc.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 69
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The memories for the ATU are backed up by a common Lithium backup battery (type CR2032 or equivalent). After two or
more years of heavy use, you may notice that the tuner memories are not being maintained, and that you have to re-tune
when returning to a frequency on which you had previously stored tuning data.
In this case, please replace the ATU Backup Battery using the following procedure:
1. Turn the transceiver’s main power switch Off.
2. Unplug the AC cable from the rear panel’s (~AC IN)
jack.
3. Referring to Figure 1, remove the eight screws (Ö)
from the side of the transceiver, along with the six
screws ( ) affixing the bottom case; remove the bottom case.
4. Now remove the three screws ( ) affixing the top
case (Figure 2), and remove the top case.
5. Referring to Figure 3, remove the screws (
) at the
top left and top right that hold the front panel assem) at the
bly in place, and loosen the two screws (
bottom left and bottom right, so they can hold the front
panel as it is folded forward.
6. Refer to Figure 4, and slide the front panel diagonally
upward and outward, then fold the front panel forward to expose the Control Unit behind it.
7. Locate the Lithium battery on the left side of the Control Unit (Figure 5).
8. Follow the guidelines in Figure 6, and remove the old
battery, replacing it with a new one of the identical type.
9. Restore the front panel to its original position, and
replace the two screws (one from each side, near the
top) and tighten the two lower screws that were loosened in step 5. Replace the top and bottom covers, reinstalling all the screws removed in steps 3 and 4.
Replace the eight screws removed from the sides of
the transceiver.
10. ATU Backup Battery replacement is now complete.
⇒
Figure 1
Quick Point
When the ATU Backup Battery is replaced, all tuner memories will be erased, and new sets of tuning data will have to
be stored.
Note
Use care in the handling and storage of the Lithium
battery. It is small, and presents a choking hazard to
small children; therefore keep such batteries out of
the reach of children at all times. Do not dispose of
Lithium batteries in fire, and do not attempt to recharge them under any circumstances.
When opening/closing the case, take care with your
screwdriver not to short out internal components, or
touch them in a way that will cause them to short out
against other components.
The exhaustion of the ATU backup battery of the
FT DX 9000 Contest is a normal “wear and tear” situation, and the loss of the backup voltage is not a “defect” or other condition covered by the Limited Warranty on this product. Accordingly, if you do not feel
capable of replacing the battery, and ask a service shop
to do so on your behalf, a service fee may apply.
Page 70
Figure 2
Remove
Loosen
Figure 3
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Slide the front panel diagonally upward and outward.
Figure 4
ATU Backup Battery
CONTROL Unit
ON
OFF
Backup Switch
Figure 5
Removal of the Lithium Backup Battery
After pushing in the direction of the arrow,
move your finger upward.
Inserting the Lithium Backup Battery
Use your fingertip to push in the
indicated direction.
×
Ø
×
Ø
+
+
+
+
Figure 6
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 71
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION (ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY)
USING THE SPEECH PROCESSOR
- SSB, AM MODE -
The Speech Processor is designed to increase “talk power” by increasing the average power output via a sophisticated
compression technique. The result is improved intelligibility when conditions are difficult.
1. Adjust the MIC gain control (# ) for SSB use, as
described on page 66.
2. Rotate the METER switch (# ) fully to the left,
so as to select “COM” (Compression).
3. Press the PROC switch (# ) momentarily. The Red
LED imbedded in the switch will light up, confirming
that the Speech Processor is engaged.
4. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak
into the microphone in a normal voice level. Observe
the deflection of the meter needle on the COMP meter
scale.
5. Rotate the PROC control (# ) so that the meter
needle deflects to not more than “10 dB” on the COMP
scale.
To switch the Speech Processor off, press the PROC
switch once more. The Red LED imbedded in the switch
will go out, confirming that the Speech processor is turned
off.
METER switch
PROC switch
MIC knob / PROC knob
METER switch
Advice
Excessive advancement of the COMP control will result
in a degradation of the transmitted signal’s signal-to-noise
ratio, thereby reducing intelligibility at the other end of
the circuit.
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed,
you may use the Audio Scope/Oscilloscope page on
the TFT to help you adjust the setting of the Compression Level of the Speech Processor for the optimum
performance using your voice and microphone.
The Transmit Monitor is another helpful way of verifying proper adjustment of the Compression level. By
Pressing the MONI key (# ) and adjusting the
MONI control (# ) for a comfortable listening
level while you are transmitting, you will be able to
hear the difference in sound quality as you make adjustments.
The RF PWR control (# ) still controls the RF
power output, whether or not the Speech Processor is
engaged.
Page 72
MIC knob / PROC knob
PROC switch
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION (ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY)
ADJUSTING THE SSB TRANSMITTED BANDWIDTH
For transmission on SSB, a default bandwidth of 2.4 kHz is provided. This bandwidth provides reasonable fidelity along
with good talk power, and is typical of the bandwidth used for decades during SSB transmission. However, the bandwidth
may be varied by the operator, so as to provide different levels of fidelity or talk power, according to your preferences.
Here's how to adjust the transmitted bandwidth on SSB:
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to engage the Menu.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) so as to
select Menu Item “MODE SSB 070 SSB-TX-BPF.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select the
desired bandwidth. The available selections are
3000WB/50-3000/100-2900/200-2800/
300-2700/400-2600,
and the default is 300-2700 Hz.
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
MNU key
Main Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Advice
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed,
you may use the Audio Scope function of the Audio
Scope/Oscilloscope page on the TFT to help you view
any changes to the passband.
The Transmit Monitor is another helpful way of verifying the effects on fidelity of changing the bandwidth.
By adjusting the MONI control (# ) for a comfortable listening level while you are transmitting, you
will be able to hear the difference in sound quality as
you make changes.
Quick Point
The higher fidelity associated with wide bandwidth
will be particularly enjoyable on the low bands, during local rag-chew QSOs.
The “3000WB” setting is a special hi-fidelity setting,
whereby the transmitted bandwidth is in excess of 3
kHz. This selection, in conjunction with judicious
adjustment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer
(see next chapter) can provide truly outstanding fidelity and very natural-sounding audio.
When using the wider bandwidth selections (especially
“3000WB”), the apparent power output from the transmitter may seem lower. This is because the available
power from the transmitter is being distributed over a
wider bandwidth, and the power detection circuitry
does not compensate for the effect of the bandwidth
selection (it is calibrated in the default 2.4 kHz bandwidth).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 73
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION (ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY)
SIGNAL QUALITY ENHANCEMENT USING THE PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER
The FT DX 9000 Contest includes a unique Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer, that provides precise, independent control over the low-, mid-, and treble-ranges in your voice wave-form.
Quick Point
The Parametric Equalizer is a unique technique for adjusting the signal quality. Because the three ranges may be
adjusted so precisely , it is possible to craft a response that provides a more natural and pleasant sound than you have
ever experienced before.
The Parametric Equalizer adjustments are applied independently to the front XLR (“Cannon”) and rear (8-pin) microphone jacks, so you can connect different microphones and customize the audio response that best suits each microphone.
The aspects of configuration that you may adjust on the Parametric Equalizer are:
Center Frequency: The center frequency of each of the three bands may be adjusted.
Gain:
Q:
The amount of enhancement (or suppression) within each band may be adjusted.
The bandwidth over which the equalization is performed may be adjusted.
1. Connect the microphone to the front or rear microphone jack.
2. Set the RF PWR control (# ) to its minimum value,
so as not to cause interference to other users during
adjustment.
Advice
Because the setup of the Parametric Equalizer for both front
and rear microphone jacks may take some time, we recommend you consider connecting a dummy load to one of the
Antenna jacks, and monitor your signal on a separate receiver,
so as to prevent interference to other users.
You will have the best chance of hearing the effects of adjustments if you wear headphones while monitoring your transmitted signal.
MONI knob
MONI switch
MNU key
Main Tuning Dial
RF PWR knob
CLAR/VFO-B knob
3. Press the MONI switch (# ).
4. Press the MNU key (# ) momentarily. The Menu
list will appear on the LCD.
5. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to Menu
Items 136 through 153; these partain to the adjustment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer.
6. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to perform
adjustments to a particular Menu item.
7. Close the PTT switch, and speak into the microphone
while listening to the effects of the changes you are
making (in step 6). Because the overall effect on the
sound will change with each adjustment you make,
you should make several passes through each adjustment area, to be sure that you are achieving the optimum setting.
8. When you have completed all adjustments, press and
hold in the MNU key for two seconds to save the
new settings and exit to normal operation. If you only
press the MNU key momentarily to exit, any changes
you performed will not be stored.
Page 74
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION (ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY)
SIGNAL QUALITY ENHANCEMENT USING THE PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER
+10dB
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
f1
f2
f3
Parametric Gain
(dB)0
-10dB
100~700Hz
700~1500Hz 1500~3200Hz
3-Stage Parametric Equalizer Adjustments: Front Panel Microphone Jack
Center Frequency
Parametric Gain
Q (Bandwidth)
TX AUDIO 136 F-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ
TX AUDIO 139 F-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ
TX AUDIO 142 F-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ
TX AUDIO 137 F-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL
TX AUDIO 140 F-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL
TX AUDIO 143 F-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
TX AUDIO 138 F-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH
TX AUDIO 141 F-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH
TX AUDIO 144 F-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH
“100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz)
“700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz)
“1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz)
(Low) “–10” (–10dB) ~ “+10” (+10dB)
(Mid) “–10” (–10dB) ~ “+10” (+10dB)
(High) “–10 (–10dB) ~ “+10” (+10dB)
(Low) “1” ~ “10”
(Mid) “1” ~ “10”
(High) “1” ~ “10”
3-Stage Parametric Equalizer Adjustments: Rear Panel Microphone Jack
Center Frequency
Parametric Gain
Q (Bandwidth)
TX AUDIO 145 R-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ
TX AUDIO 148 R-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ
TX AUDIO 151 R-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ
TX AUDIO 146 R-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL
TX AUDIO 149 R-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL
TX AUDIO 152 R-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
TX AUDIO 147 R-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH
TX AUDIO 150 R-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH
TX AUDIO 153 R-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
“100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz)
“700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz)
“1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz)
(Low) “-10” (–10dB) ~ “+10” (+10dB)
(Mid) “–10” (–10dB) ~ “+10” (+10dB)
(High) “–10” (-10dB) ~ “+10” (+10dB)
(Low) “1” ~ “10”
(Mid) “1” ~ “10”
(High) “1” ~ “10”
Page 75
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION (LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION)
LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION
Class-A operation of the FT DX 9000 Contest transmitter is provided, yielding ultra-low distortion products during SSB
operation. Power output during Class-A operation is 75 Watts.
To engage Class-A operation,
press the CLASS-A switch
(# ). The imbedded Red LED
will light up, confirming that ClassA operation has been selected.
Engaging the “Class-A” mode
actually places the transceiver in
a condition whereby the Bias
level may be adjusted, using the
BIAS control (# ), to set the
transceiver for operation anywhere between Class A and Class
AB (which has lower heat dissipation but higher distortion
products). Clockwise rotation of the BIAS control increases the Bias, and fully clockwise rotation of the BIAS
control will place the transmitter in fully Class-A operation. Counter-clockwise rotation of the BIAS control
will move the transmitter toward Class AB operation.
CLASS-A switch
BIAS knob
To exit from the CLASS-A mode, press the CLASS-A
switch once more. The Red LED imbedded in the switch
will go out, confirming that the CLASS-A mode has been
disengaged.
Continuous adjustment of the
Bias Level between Class-A
and Class-AB is possible.
Class-AB
Class-A
Input
Class-AB and Class-A Operating Principle
Advice
During Class-A operation, ten Amps of Bias current will be flowing, regardless of the modulation level that leads to actual power output. Therefore, if the ambient temperature in your
operation location is high, the transceiver temperature may rise as well, due to the high bias
level (which must be dissipated as heat). Depending on the temperature, you may wish to
reduce the setting of the BIAS control, so as to reduce the amount of heat being generated.
During Class A operation, we recommend that you monitor the heat sink temperature by pressing the TEMP switch
(# ) so as to engage the temperature monitoring mode of the TEMP/SWR meter (# ). Usually, the temperature
will be well below the 80 °C “Red Zone,” because the fan speed will increase to control a rise in temperature. If you are
operating in a hot environment, though, and the increasing fan speed does not maintain the temperature below 80 °C,
try adjusting the Bias Level temporarily in the direction of Class AB operation; this will reduce the amount of heat
being dissipated in the heat sink.
The Bias Level is displayed on the VDD/BIAS meter (# ) when the BIAS switch (# ) is pushed. On the “Bias”
scale, “0%” represents Class AB operation, while “100%” represents Class A operation.
An innovative aspect of the “Class-A” mode is that the actual power output is always limited to 75 Watts. So even
though you might adjust the BIAS control in the direction of Class-AB operation, the power output will not rise; this
eliminates the need, for example, to re-tune your linear amplifier, if used.
Quick Point
Page 76
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION (LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION)
LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION
Class-A operation provides a significant improvement in transmitter distortion suppression. During Class-A, the 3rdorder IMD products are typically suppressed 50 dB, while the 5th- and higher-order IMD products (that can cause
“splatter” that interferes with others) will typically be suppressed 70 dB or more.
If you are using a linear amplifier such as the VL-1000, the low distortion produced by the FT DX 9000 Contest’s
transmitter means that these intermodulation distortion products will not exist to be amplified by your linear.
High-Power 200-Watt Final Amplifier Stage
The final amplifier stage of the FT DX 9000 Contest utilizes a pair of ST Micro Electronics Corp. SD2931 MOSFET
devices operating at 50 Volts. This push-pull configuration provides low distortion along with high power output. The
120 mm thermostatically-controlled cooling fan directs forced air across the heat sink, should the heat sink temperature
exceed the temperature that will trigger the thermostat.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 77
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
VOICE MEMORY
You may utilize the Voice Memory capability of the FT DX 9000 Contest by plugging in the supplied FH-2 Remote Control
Keypad into the rear panel’s REMOTE jack.
The Voice Memory system includes five memories capable of storing up to 20 seconds of voice audio each. The maximum
that any memory can hold is 20 seconds. Please see the diagram depicting connection of the FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
on page 15.
Recording Your Own Voice in Memory
1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front
panel Mode selector switches.
2. Press the MEM key on the FH-2.
Checking Your Recording
1. Be sure that the front panel MOX switch is Off (not
pushed in).
2. Press the 1 ~ 5 key (whichever one you just recorded in), and you will hear the contents of the voice
memory you just recorded.
LOCK
ON
OFF
LOCK
ON
3. Press any of the keys numbered 1 through 5 to
select that memory storage register. If you do not press
the PTT key (see next step) within five seconds, the
memory storage process will be cancelled.
LOCK
ON
OFF
OFF
Advice
You may rotate the AF GAIN control (#
just the playback level of the recording.
) to ad-
Transmitting the Recorded Message
1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front
panel MODE selector switches (# ).
2. Press the front panel’s BK-IN/SPOT switch (# ).
3. Press the FH-2 1 ~ 5 key, depending on which
memory register's message you wish to transmit. If
you hit the key again during playback, the message
will be terminated.
LOCK
4. Press the microphone’s PTT switch, and speak into
the microphone in a normal voice level to record the
message (such as “CQ DX, CQ DX, this is W 6 Delta
X-Ray Charlie, W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, Over”). Remember that the time limit for recording any message
is 20 seconds.
5. Press the FH-2 MEM key to terminate the message
storage process.
Page 78
ON
OFF
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
NOTE
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 79
CONVENIENT TRANSMITTER ACCESSORIES
VOX: AUTOMATIC TX/RX SWITCHING USING VOICE CONTROL SSB/AM/FM MODES
Instead of using the microphone’s PTT switch or the front panel MOX switch to activate the transmitter, the VOX (Voice
Operated TX/RX Control) system provides hands-free, automatic activation of the transmitter, based on voice input into
the microphone. Setup of the VOX system takes only a few seconds.
1. To start, set the DELAY and VOX controls (# )
fully counter-clockwise (to the left).
2. Press the VOX switch (# ) to engage VOX operation.
3. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level,
and rotate the VOX knob clockwise (to the right)
until the point where your voice input activates the
transmitter.
Do not advance the setting of the VOX control too much,
because to do so will make the transmitter respond to minor
background noises in your station.
4. Now stop speaking, and note the amount of time it
takes for the receiver to recover. If the hang time is
too long or too short; rotate the DELAY knob, while
speaking briefly into the microphone and then pausing, so as to set the desired hang time. Clockwise rotation of the DELAY control will increase the hang
time.
5. To exit from VOX operation, press the VOX switch
once more. We recommend doing this if you are going to leave your station, to prevent inadvertent activation of the VOX system by a ringing nearby telephone, speaker audio from a TV, etc.
VOX switch
DELAY knob / VOX knob
Advice
VOX operation may be engaged on either Voice modes
(SSB/AM/FM) and on AFSK-based Data modes. Use
Menu item “TX GNRL 159 VOX SELECT” (the selections are “MIC” and “DATA”).
USING THE MONITOR
You may listen to the quality of your transmitted signal using the Monitor feature.
1. Press the MONI switch (# ). The imbedded Red
LED will light up, indicating that the Monitor is turned
on.
2. During transmission, rotate the MONI knob (# )
to adjust the audio level from the Monitor. Clockwise
rotation of this knob will increase the volume level.
3. To switch the Monitor off again, press the MONI
switch once more. The Red LED will go out, confirming that the Monitor is now disengaged.
MONI knob
MONI switch
Advice
If you are using the speaker for monitoring, instead of
headphones, excessive advancement of the MONI
control can cause feedback to occur. Additionally, this
feedback can cause the VOX system to hang up in a
loop, making it impossible to return to receive. Therefore, we recommend the use of headphones, if at all
possible, or the minimum usable setting of the
MONI control, if the speaker must be used.
Because the Monitor feature utilizes a sampling of the
transmitter’s IF signal, it can be very useful for checking the adjustment of the Speech Processor or Parametric Equalizer on SSB, and for checking the general signal quality on AM and FM.
Page 80
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT TRANSMITTER ACCESSORIES
SPLIT OPERATION USING THE TX CLARIFIER (VFO-A OPERATION)
For split TX/RX operation in “casual” pile-ups, where the split is less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier (Offset Tuning) feature
may be utilized.
1. Press the CLAR switch (# ). The Red LED imbedded in the switch will light up, and “CLAR” will appear
in the display. The CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) will
now be enabled for offset tuning of the transmitter.
Advice
TX switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Please verify that the lamp to the right of the CLAR/VFOB knob is not lit up in Orange. If so, this indicates that this
knob is currently engaged for VFO-B tuning. If the Orange
lamp is lit, press the A/B switch (# ), then press the
CLAR switch, to engage Clarifier operation.
CLAR switch
CLEAR switch
Quick Point
The Clarifier is frequently used for receiver offset tuning. However, for DX pile-ups where the DX station is using a split of
less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier function is usually the quickest way to set the transmitter to the desired offset frequency.
2. Press the TX switch (# ), located above and to
the right of the CLAR/VFO-B knob. The “TX”
notation will appear on the frequency display to the
left of the main frequency.
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob to set the desired
transmitter offset. A maximum split of ± 9.999 kHz
may be set.
To disengage the transmit Clarifier temporarily, press the
TX switch once more. The “TX” indication will disappear from the frequency display area.
To exit from Clarifier operation, press the CLAR switch
once more. The “CLAR” indication will disappear from
the display.
Advice
To listen to the pile-up calling the DX station, so as to
find the station currently being worked, you may press
the RX switch (# ) (above and to the left of the
CLAR/VFO-B knob). Once you have zeroed in on
the station calling the DX (use the SPOT function on
CW for precise alignment of your frequency), you may
then press the RX switch again to cancel the RX
Clarifier, and return to reception on the DX station’s
frequency.
Just as with receiver Clarifier operation, the amount
of offset from the original VFO frequency will appear
in the small display window.
As with receiver Clarifier operation, when you turn
the TX Clarifier off the last-used offset is not lost, and
will be available if you turn the TX Clarifier back on.
To clear the Clarifier offset, press the CLAR switch.
Clarifier Offset Bar Indicator
A visual depiction of the relative offset of the Clarifier may be displayed, using the Bar Indicator.
1. Press the MNU key (# ); the Menu list will
appear on the LCD.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select Menu item “DISPLAY 016 BAR DISPLAY
SELECT.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B control (# ) to select “CLAR” form the available choices; the factory default is “CW-TUNE.”
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
(TX frequency < RX frequency)
(TX frequency = RX frequency)
(TX frequency > RX frequency)
Page 81
CONVENIENT TRANSMITTER ACCESSORIES
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
A powerful capability of the FT DX 9000 Contest is its flexibility in Split Frequency operation, using the VFO-A and VFOB frequency registers. This makes the FT DX 9000 Contest especially useful for high-level DX-pedition use, as the Split
operation capability is very advanced and easy to use.
1. Set the VFO-A frequency as desired.
2. Set the VFO-B frequency.
3. Now press the SPLIT switch (# ). The “Split”
mode will be engaged, and the front panel switch/LEDs
will look like this:
VFO-A
RX switch (# ) “ON” (LED glows Green)
TX switch (# ) “OFF” (LED Off)
VFO-B
RX switch (# ) “OFF” (LED Off)
TX switch (# ) “ON”(LED glows Red)
VFO-A
RX switch “ON”
(LED glows Green)
SPLIT switch
SPLIT
(LED glows Orange)
VFO-B
TX switch “ON”
(LED glows Red)
VFO-A
TX switch “OFF”
(LED Off)
VFO-B
RX switch “OFF”
(LED Off)
During Split operation, the VFO-A register will be used
for reception, while the VFO-B register will be used for
transmission. If you press the SPLIT switch once more,
Split operation will be cancelled.
You may also press the TX switch located above and to
the right of the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to return
transmit frequency control to the VFO-A side, and thereby
cancel Split operation.
Advice
During normal (non-split) VFO-A operation, you may
simply press the VFO-B TX switch (located above
and to the right of the CLAR/VFO-B knob: # )
to engage Split operation. The TX indicator will
glow Red when you press the switch.
W B switch
During Split operation, pressing the AX
(# ) will reverse the contents of the VFO-A and
VFO-B. Press the AX
W B switch once more to return to the original frequency alignment.
During Split operation, you may also press the TXW
(# ) switch (below and to the left of the Main Tuning Dial) to listen to the TX frequency temporarily.
It is possible to set different operating modes (for example, LSB and USB) on the two VFOs used during
Split operation.
During Split operation, it also is possible to set the
VFO-A and VFO-B to different Amateur bands, and
it also is possible to engage Crossband operation for
multiplier hunting while calling CQ on the “TX” band.
Page 82
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CONVENIENT TRANSMITTER ACCESSORIES
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
Quick Split Operation
The Quick Split feature allows you to set a one-touch offset of +5 kHz to be applied to your radio’s transmit frequency
on the VFO-B, compared to the VFO-A frequency.
1. Start with regular transceiver operation on the VFOA.
VFO-A
RX switch (# ) “ON” (LED glows Green)
TX switch (# ) “ON” (LED glows Red)
VFO-B
RX switch (# ) “OFF” (LED Off)
TX switch (# ) “OFF” (LED Off)
2. Press and hold in the SPLIT switch (# ) for
two seconds to engage the Quick Split feature, and
apply a frequency 5 kHz above the VFO-A frequency to the VFO-B frequency register.
Press and hold in the SPLIT switch for two seconds to increment the VFO-A frequency to +5 kHz.
The VFO configuration will then be:
VFO-A
RX switch “ON” (LED glows Green)
TX switch “OFF” (LED Off)
VFO-B
RX switch “OFF” (LED Off)
TX switch “ON” (LED glows Red)
VFO-A
RX switch “ON”
(LED glows Green)
SPLIT switch
SPLIT
Indicator
VFO-A
TX switch “OFF”
(LED Off)
VFO-B
TX switch “ON”
(LED glows Red)
VFO-B
RX switch “OFF”
(LED Off)
Quick Point
The operating mode applied to the VFO-B register
will be the same as that in use on the VFO-A register.
The offset of the VFO-B from the VFO-A is programmed via the Menu, and is set to +5 kHz at the
factory. Other offsets may be selected, however,
using the following procedure:
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select Menu item “GENERAL 032 QUICK SPLIT
FREQ.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select
the desired offset.
The available selections are
-20kHz ~ 0kHz ~ +20kHz (factory default: +5 kHz).
4. When you have completed all adjustments, press
and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
If you only press the MNU key momentarily to
exit, any changes you performed will not be stored.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MNU key
Main Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Page 83
CW MODE OPERATION
The powerful CW operating capabilities of the FT DX 9000Contest include operation using both an electronic keyer paddle
and a “straight key” or emulation thereof, as is provided by a computer-based keying device.
SETUP FOR STRAIGHT KEY (AND STRAIGHT KEY EMULATION) OPERATION
Before starting, connect your key line to the front and/or rear panel KEY jack, and be sure the KEYER switch on the
left side of the front panel is turned off for now.
1. Press the CW mode switch
(# ) to engage CW operation.
The operating mode is selected using the MODE switches to the left
of the Main Tuning Dial knob
(# ), and the VFO (A or B) to
which the selection is applied is selected by pressing the A or B
switch above the Mode keys. Please
be sure you are engaging CW on the
right VFO.
The LED associated with your VFO
and (CW) Mode selection will light up.
If you press the CW key once more, after initially selecting
CW, you will engage the “CW Reverse” mode (see page 88),
whereby the “opposite” sideband injection is used, compared
to the “normal” sideband. The CW LED will blink for three
seconds if you select CW Reverse.
2. Rotate the MAIN Tuning Dial knob (#
the desired operating frequency.
3. Press the BK-IN/SPOT key
(# ) momentarily to engage automatic activation of the transmitter when you close the CW key.
The LED imbedded in the BKIN/SPOT switch will light up.
MODE switch
BK-IN switch
Main Tuning Dial
) to select
When you close your CW key, the transmitter will automatically be activated, and the CW carrier will be transmitted.
When you release the key, transmission will cease after a brief
delay; the delay time is user-programmable, per the discussion on page 89.
As shipped from the factory, the FT DX 9000 Contest TX/RX
system for CW is configured for “Semi-break-in” operation.
However, using Menu item “MODE-CW 047 CW BK-IN,”
you may change this setup for full break-in (QSK) operation,
whereby the switching is quick enough to hear incoming signals in the spaces between the dots and dashes of your transmission. This may prove very useful during contest and traffic-handling operations.
4. Operation using your CW key may now proceed.
Advice
You can monitor your sending by pressing the
MONI key (# ), and adjust the MONI control
(# ) for a comfortable listening level on the CW
sidetone.
If you set the BK-IN/SPOT switch to Off, you may
practice your sending without having the signal go out
over the air (sidetone only).
Terminology
Semi-break-in
This is a pseudo- “VOX” mode used on CW, whereby the closure of the CW key will engage the transmitter, and
release of the key will allow the receiver to receive after a short delay. No signals will be heard between the spaces
between dots and dashes (unless the sending speed is extremely slow).
Full break-in
Full break-in (Also known as “Full QSK”) involves very fast switching between transmit and receive, such that incoming signals may be heard between the dots and dashes as you send them. This allows you to hear a station that suddenly
starts transmitting on your frequency, while you are in the midst of a transmission.
Page 84
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CW MODE OPERATION
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
Connect the cable from your keyer paddle to the front or rear panel KEY jack.
1. Press the CW mode switch
(# ) to engage CW operation.
If you press the CW key once
more, after initially selecting CW,
you will engage the “CW Reverse”
mode (see page 88), whereby the
“opposite” sideband injection is
used, compared to the “normal” sideband. The CW LED will blink for
three seconds if you select CW Reverse.
SPEED knob
MODE key
BK-IN/SPOT swich
Main Tuning Dial
KEYER swich
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial
knob (# ) to select the desired operating frequency.
3. Press the KEYER switch (# ).
The LED imbedded in the
switch will light up, confirming that the built-in
Electronic Keyer is now
active.
4. Rotate the SPEED control (# ) to set the desired sending speed. Clockwise rotation of the SPEED control will increase
the keying speed.
When you press either the “Dot” or “Dash” side of your paddle,
the transmitter will automatically be
activated.
5. If you press the BK-IN/SPOT
key (# ) momentarily, “semibreak-in” operation (discussed
previously) will be engaged.
6. CW operation utilizing your paddle may now commence.
When you utilize your keyer paddle, the transmitter will automatically be activated, and the CW characters (or a strong of
dots and dashes) will be transmitted. When you release the
keyer paddle contacts, transmission will cease after a brief
delay; the delay time is user-programmable, per the discussion on page 89.
Advice
If you reduce power using the RF PWR control (# ),
the ALC meter reading will increase; this is normal and
does not indicate any problem whatsoever (because increased ALC voltage is being used to lower the power).
Full Break-in (QSK) Operation
As shipped from the factory, the FT DX 9000 Contest TX/RX system for CW is configured for “Semibreak-in” operation. However, using Menu item
“MODE-CW 047 CW BK-IN,” you may change
this setup for full break-in (QSK) operation, whereby
the switching is quick enough to hear incoming signals in the spaces between the dots and dashes of
your transmission.
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to open the Menu.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select
Menu item “MODE-CW 047 CW BK-IN.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to set
this Menu item to “FULL.”
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to save the new setting and exit.
A number of interesting and useful features are available during Electronic Keyer operation.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 85
CW MODE OPERATION
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
Setting the Keyer Weight (Dot/Space:Dash ) Ratio
The Menu may be used to adjust the Weight for the built-in Electronic Keyer. The default weighting is 3:1 (a dash is
three times longer than a dot or space).
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select Menu item “MODE-CW 049 CW WEIGHT.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B key (# ) to set the
weight to the desired value. The available adjustment range is for a Dot/Space:Dash ratio of 2.5 ~
4.5 (default value: 3.0).
4. When you are finished, press and hold in the
MNU key for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Main Tuning Dial
MNU key
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode
The configuration of the Electronic Keyer may be customized independently for the front and rear KEY jacks of
the FT DX 9000 Contest. This permits utilization of Automatic Character Spacing (ACS), if desired, as well as the use
of the electronic keyer via the front jack and a straight key or computer-driven keying line via the rear panel.
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select
Menu item “MODE-CW 041 F-KEYER TYPE”
(for the front KEY jack) or “MODE-CW 043
R-KEYER TYPE” (for the rear-panel’s KEY
jack).
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to set the
keyer to the desired mode. The available selections
are:
OFF:
The built-in Electronic Keyer is turned
off (“straight key” mode.)
BUG:
Dots will be generated automatically by
the keyer, but dashes must be sent manually.
ELEKEY: Both dots and dashes will be generated
automatically when you use your
paddle.
ACS:
Same as “ELEKEY” except that the
spacing between characters is precisely
set by the keyer to be the same length
as a dash (three dots in length.)
4. When you are finished, press and hold in the
MNU key for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Page 86
Main Tuning Dial
MNU key
CLAR/VFO-B knob
ACS
OFF
Morse
"E" & "T"
Space
ACS
ON
Morse
"E" & "T"
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CW SPOTTING (ZERO-BEATING)
“Spotting” (zeroing in on another CW station) is a handy
technique for ensuring that you and the other station are
precisely on the same frequency.
PITCH knob
For everyday operation, the (CW) PITCH control (# )
allows you to set the center of the receiver passband, as
well as the offset pitch of your CW carrier signal, to the
tone pitch you prefer to listen to.
The front panel’s Tuning Meter may also be moved so you
can adjust your receiver frequency to center the incoming
station on the pitch corresponding to that of your transmitted signal.
Using the SPOT System
If you press and hold in the front panel’s BK-IN/SPOT
key (# ), the Spot tone will be heard. This tone corresponds to the pitch of your transmitted signal, and if you
adjust the receiver frequency to match the pitch of the received CW signal to that of the Spot tone, your transmitted signal will be precisely matched to that of the other
station.
Advice
In a tough DX pile-up, you may actually want to use
the SPOT system to find a “gap” in the spread of calling stations, instead of zeroing in precisely on the last
station being worked by the DX station. From the DX
side, if a dozen or more operators (also using Yaesu's
SPOT system) all call precisely on the same frequency,
their dots and dashes merge into a single, long tone
that the DX station cannot decipher. In such situations,
calling slightly higher or lower may get your call
through.
The bar indicator on the front panel may be utilized
for CW frequency adjustment, as well. Its configuration is set via Menu item “DISPLAY 016 BAR DISPLAY SELECT;” at the factory, the bar indicator is
already set up for the “CW TUNE” selection.
Retune (Shift to Lower Frequency)
Zero-In
BK-IN/SPOT switch
Main Tuning Dial
MONI switch
PITCH knob
BK-IN/SPOT switch
Quick Point
The CW Spotting process utilizes the Spot tone or the
bar indicator, with the actual offset pitch being set by
the (CW) PITCH control on the front panel. The
offset pitch may be set to any frequency between 300
Hz and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps, and you can either
match tones audibly (using the BK-IN/SPOT key)
or align the receiver frequency so that the central LED
on the bar indicator lights up. Note that there are 51
“dots” on the bar indicator, and depending on the resolution selected, the incoming CW signal may fall outside the visible range of the bar indicator, if you are
not reasonably close to the proper alignment of tones.
The displayed frequency, on CW, normally reflects
the “zero beat” frequency of your offset carrier. That
is, if you were to listen on USB on 14.100.00 MHz to
a signal with a 700 Hz offset, the “zero beat” frequency
of that CW carrier would be 14.000.70 MHz; the latter frequency is what the FT DX 9000 Contest displays,
by default. However, you can change the display to be
identical to that of what you would see on SSB by
using Menu item “MODE-CW 050 CW-FREQ DISPLAY” and setting it to “FREQ” instead of its default
“PITCH” setting.
Retune (Shift to Higher Frequency)Ú
Ú: When the CW reverse feature is activated, the indication of the Tuning
Offset Indicator will also be reversed.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 87
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
USING CW REVERSE
If you experience a difficult interference situation, where
an interfering station cannot readily be eliminated, you may
wish to try receiving using the opposite sideband. This
may throw the interfering station’s frequency in a direction that may lend itself more readily to rejection.
MODE switch
To start, let's use a typical example where you have set the
CW mode (using the default “USB” injection) onto the
VFO-A.
Now be sure your mode selection is still set for the
VFO-A register, and press the CW mode key (# )
once more. The “LSB” LED will blink for three seconds, indicating that the “LSB” injection side has now
been selected.
When using Dual Receive, just press the B Mode
key (# ), then press the CW key to engage CW
Reverse on the VFO-B, in exactly the same was as for
the VFO-A.
Press the CW mode key (# ) once more to return to the normal (USB) injection side and cancel
CW Reverse operation.
A
Carrier
Normal CW
( USB )
QRM
In the illustration, Figure A demonstrates the normal
CW injection setup, using the USB side. In Figure
B, CW Reverse has been engaged, so as to receive
using LSB-side injection to eliminate interference.
The beneficial effect of switching sidebands can
clearly be seen in this example.
Signal
RX Passband
B
Carrier
Signal
CW Reverse
( LSB )
QRM
RX Passband
Note
When CW Reverse is engaged, the Tuning Meter action
will concurrently be reversed as to its indication.
When the incoming signal pitch tone is properly aligned,
the central LED lights up whether or not CW Reverse is
engaged.
Retune (Shift to Lower Frequency)
Zero-In
Retune (Shift to Higher Frequency)
Page 88
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CW DELAY TIME SETTING
During semi-break-in (not QSK) operation, the hang time
of the transmitter, after you have finished sending, may be
adjusted to a comfortable value consistent with your sending speed. This is the functional equivalent to the “VOX
Delay” adjustment used on voice modes; however, this is
an independent adjustment used on CW, so you don’t have
to change the delay when changing from Voice to CW.
The delay may be varied anywhere between 0 seconds
( CW DELAY (# ) set fully counter-clockwise) to 5
seconds (fully clockwise).
CW DELAY knob
KEYER Switch
1. Press the BK-IN/SPOT key (# ) momentarily to
enable CW transmission (Menu item “MODE-CW 047
CW BK-IN” must be set to “SEMI”).
2. Start sending, and adjust the CW DELAY knob
(# ) so that the hang time is as you prefer for comfortable operation.
Quick Point
The CW Delay feature is the functional equivalent to the
“VOX Delay” adjustment used on voice modes; however,
this is an independent adjustment used on CW, so you don’t
have to change the delay when changing from Voice to
CW.
CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT
Rotation of the front panel’s CW PITCH control (# )
will allow adjustment of the center frequency of the receiver passband, as well as the pitch of your offset CW
carrier, to the tone you prefer. The tone may be varied
between 300 Hz and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps.
PITCH knob
Terminology
CW Pitch
If you tuned to an exact “zero beat” on an incoming CW signal, you could not copy it (“Zero beat” implies a 0 Hz tone).
Therefore, the receiver is offset several hundreds of Hz (typically), so as to allow your ear to detect the tone. The BFO
offset associated with this tuning (that produces the comfortable audio tone) is called the CW Pitch.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 89
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
The rise and fall times of the CW envelope may be adjusted using the Menu. The default setting of 4 ms. is ideal for most
operation, as it produces a nicely “rounded” shape to the CW character. However, the rise and fall times may be adjusted to
1/2/4/6 ms, as desired, using Menu item “MODE-CW 048 CW WAVE SHAPE.” We generally do not recommend adjustment of this parameter, but if you are using a linear amplifier that is causing some sharpens of the CW character, you may
wish to try the 6 ms setting. Too fast a rise/fall time can produce “hard” keying that borders on the creation of key clicks.
Contest Memory Keyer
The supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad may be used as a control keypad for the automatic sending of CW messages (as
you might do in a contest).
Two techniques for message storage are available: you may either send the desired message contents using your keyer
paddle (“Message Memory”), or you may input the text characters (“Text Memory”).
See page 15 for details regarding interconnection of the FH-2.
Message Memory
Five memory channels capable of retaining 50 characters total are provided (using the PARIS standard for characters and
word length).
Example : CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K (14 characters)
−•−• −−•−
(C)
(Q)
−•−• −−•−
(C)
(Q)
−•−• −−•−
(C)
(Q)
Storing a Message into Memory
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select the
CW Memory Register into which you wish to store
the message; for now, we are just selecting the message entry technique (Keyer entry or Text entry).
FH-2SET 023 CW MEMORY 1
FH-2SET 024 CW MEMORY 2
FH-2SET 025 CW MEMORY 3
FH-2SET 026 CW MEMORY 4
FH-2SET 027 CW MEMORY 5
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to set the
selected Memory Register to “MESSAGE.” If you
want to use your keyer paddle for message entry on
all memories, set all five Menu items (#023 ~ 027) to
“MESSAGE.”
4. Press and hold in the MNU key to save the new
settings and exit.
−•• • •−− −•••• −•• −••− −•−•
(D) (E) (W) (6)
(D) (X)
(C)
Main Tuning Dial
−•−
(K)
MNU key
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Terminology
PARIS Word Length
By convention in the Amateur industry (utilized by ARRL and others), the length of one “word” of CW is defined as the
length of the Morse Code characters spelling the word “PARIS.” This character (dot/dash/space) length is used for the
rigorous definition of code speed in “words per minute.”
Page 90
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
Message Memory Programming (Using Your Paddle)
1. Set the operating mode to CW.
2. Set the BK-IN/SPOT switch (# ) to Off.
3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer On by pressing the
KEYER switch (# ), if necessary.
4. Press the FH-2’s MEM key.
Checking the CW Memory Contents
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off.
2. Press the FH-2’s 1 ~ 5 key to check your work.
You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF
energy will be transmitted.
LOCK
ON
OFF
LOCK
ON
OFF
5. Press the 1 ~ 5 key on the FH-2 to begin the
memory storage process.
LOCK
ON
OFF
On-The-Air CW Message Playback
1. Press the BK-IN/SPOT key to enable transmission.
Either Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depending on the setting of Menu item “MODE-CW 047
CW BK-IN.”
2. Press the FH-2’s 1 ~ 5 key to transmit the programmed message.
Note
If you subsequently decide to use the “Text” technique for memory
storage, please note that the contents of a message stored using
keyer paddle input will not be transferred over when you select
“TEXT” on a particular memory register.
LOCK
ON
OFF
6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle.
7. Press the MEM key on the FH-2 once more at the
end of your message. Up to 50 characters may be
stored among the five memories.
Note
You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the spaces between letters and words are accurately done; if your timing is off,
the spacing may not come out right in the stored message.
For ease in setting up the keyer memories, we recommend you set
Menu item “MODE-CW 041 F-KEYER TYPE” and/or “MODECW 043 R-KEYER TYPE” to “ACS” (Automatic Character Spacing) while you are programming the keyer memories.
Transmitting in the Beacon Mode
It is possible to transmit, repetitively in a “Beacon” mode, any
message programmed either via paddle input or via the “Text”
input method. The time delay between message repeats may be
set anywhere between 0 and 255 seconds via Menu item “FH-2
SET 021 BEACON TIME.” If you do not wish the message to
repeat in a “Beacon” mode, please set this Menu item to “Off.”
Press the 1 ~ 5 key, depending on the register into which
the Beacon message is stored. Repetitive transmission of the Beacon message will begin. Press one of these keys once more to
halt the Beacon transmissions.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 91
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
TEXT Memory
The five channels of CW message memory (up to 50 characters total) may also be programmed using a text-entry technique. This technique is somewhat slower than when you send the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accuracy
of character spacing is ensured.
Example 1 : CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K} (20 characters)
Now we will utilize another powerful feature of the CW Memory Keyer, the sequential contest number (“Countup”) feature.
Example 2 : 599 10 200 # K} (15 characters)
Advice
By referring to the chart, you may view the characters available for message entry (both capital and small letters, plus
numbers and a few punctuation marks, are available).
Contest Number Programming
Use this process if you are starting a contest, or of you
somehow get out of sync with the proper number in the
middle of a contest.
1. Press the FH-2’s DEC key for two seconds. The
current Contest Number will be displayed.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial to set the Contest
Number to the desired value.
3. Press the DEC key for two seconds to store the
new number.
Main Tuning Dial
MNU key
CLAR/VFO-B knob
TEXT
!
”
$
%
&
’
(
)
+
,
-
CW
SN
AF
SX
KA
AS
WG
KN
KK
AR
MIM
DU
TEXT
.
/
:
;
=
|
?
_
>
Text Memory Storage
1 Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select the
CW Memory Register into which you wish to store
the message; we are now selecting the message entry
technique (Text entry).
FH-2SET 023 CW MEMORY 1
FH-2SET 024 CW MEMORY 2
FH-2SET 025 CW MEMORY 3
FH-2SET 026 CW MEMORY 4
FH-2SET 027 CW MEMORY 5
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to set the
selected Memory Register to “TEXT.”
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to
save the new settings and exit.
CW
AAA
DN
OS
KR
BT
SK
IMI
HH
AL
IQ
Note that some punctuation and other marks (
listed, but they are displayed only and cannot be transmitted.
) are
LOCK
ON
OFF
Decrementing the Contest Number
Use this process if the current contest number gets
slightly ahead of the actual number you want to send
(in case of a duplicate QSO, for example).
Press the FH-2’s DEC key momentarily. The current
Contest Number will be reduced by one. Press the
DEC key as many times as necessary to reach the
desired number. If you go too far, use the “Contest Number Programming” technique described above.
Page 92
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
Text Message Programming
1. Press the CW Mode key (# ) to set the operating
mode to CW.
2. Be sure that Break-in is Off by pressing the BK-IN/
SPOT key (# ), if necessary.
3. Press the FH-2’s MEM key.
Checking the CW Memory Contents
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned Off.
2. Press the FH-2’s 1 ~ 5 key to check your work.
You will hear the results in the sidetone, but no RF
energy will be transmitted.
LOCK
ON
OFF
LOCK
ON
OFF
4. Press the FH-2’s 1 ~ 5 key to select the desired
Message Memory Register into which you wish to program the text.
LOCK
ON
OFF
On-The-Air CW Message Playback
1. Press the BK-IN/SPOT key to enable transmission.
Either Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depending on the setting of Menu item “MODE-CW 047
CW BK-IN.”
2. Press the FH-2’s 1 ~ 5 key to transmit the programmed message.
Note
If you subsequently decide to use the “MESSAGE” technique for
memory storage, please note that the contents of a message stored
using text input will not be transferred over when you select “MESSAGE” on a particular memory register.
LOCK
ON
and
keys to set the cursor
5. Use the FH-2’s
position and use the
and
keys to choose
the letter/number to be programmed in each slot of
the memory. In the case of the second example above,
the “}” character designates the slot where the Contest Number will appear.
Advice
You may also use the Main Tuning Dial (#
VFO-B knobs (#
OFF
) and the CLAR/
) to program the message characters.
LOCK
ON
OFF
Correcting/Editing Previously-Stored
Characters
Use the Main Tuning Dial knob (#
) to select the letter/num-
ber to be corrected, then rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (#
)
to choose the revised letter/number top be utilized in this slot.
Deleting Previously-stored Characters
Use the Main Tuning Dial knob (#
6. Press the FH-2’s MEM key again once all characters have been programmed.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
) to select the last cor-
rect letter in the message. Now rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob
(#
) to select the “ } ” character; everything after the “ } ”
character will be deleted.
Page 93
FM MODE OPERATION
1. Press the FM mode key (#
erating mode.
) to select the FM op-
MOX switch
MODE switch
Be sure that the FM mode is being selected on the proper
VFO; check the status of the A and B switches above the
mode selection keys before making your mode selection.
The LED (Red or Orange) corresponding to the VFO on which
you selected FM (VFO-A or VFO-B, respectively), will light
up.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) (in the
case of VFO-A operation) to select the desired operating frequency. If using the optional MD-200A8X Desk
Microphone, pressing the [UP] or [DOWN] button
will cause frequency change in 5 kHz steps.
3. Press the microphone’s PTT switch (or press the front
panel MOX switch (# )) to transmit. Speak into
the microphone in a normal voice level. Release the
PTT or MOX switch to return to receive.
4. Adjustment of the microphone gain may be accomplished in two ways. At the factory, a default level has
been programmed that should be satisfactory for most
situations. However, using Menu item “MODE-FM
058 FM MIC GAIN,” you may set a different fixed
value, or choose the “MCVR” option, which then lets
you use the front panel MIC control (# ) to set
the microphone gain in the FM mode. The microphone
gain should be set such that deflection of the ALC
meter goes all the way to the right side of the ALC
meter scale.
MONI knob
MONI switch
MAIN Tuning Dial
Advice
The FH-2 may be used, in the FM mode, for storage
of voice memory messages. See page 92.
FM is only used in the 28 MHz and 50 MHz Amateur
bands covered in the FT DX 9000 Contest. Please do
not use FM on any other bands.
Reduction of the setting of the RF PWR knob (# )
will cause the deflection of the ALC meter to increase;
this is normal.
Page 94
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
FM MODE OPERATION
REPEATER OPERATION
The FT DX 9000 Contest may be utilized on 29 MHz and 50 MHz repeaters.
1. Rotate the Main tuning Dial to the output frequency
(downlink) from the repeater.
2. If CTCSS Tone operation is desired/needed, press and
hold in the FM Mode key (# ) for two seconds to
engage the CTCSS mode.
3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select
the desired CTCSS mode. If you just need to send the
uplink encoding tone, select “tn.” For encode/decode
operation, choose “ts” instead.
The available choices are
“OFF”
“tn” “ts” “OFF.”
4. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select the
desired CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50 standard CTCSS tones are provided (see the CTCSS Tone
Chart).
5. Press the FM Mode key to select the desired repeater shift direction.
The selections are
“S”
“+”
“−”
“S”
where “S” represents “Simplex” operation (not used
on a repeater).
6. Press and hold in the FM Mode key for two seconds to exit from the repeater setup mode.
7. Close the microphone’s PTT switch (or press the
MOX switch (# )) to begin transmission. You will
observe that the frequency has shifted to correspond
to the programming you set up in the previous steps.
Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level,
and release the PTT or MOX switch to return to the
receive mode.
Advice
The conventional repeater shift used on 29 MHz is 100
kHz, while on the 50 MHz band the shift may vary between 500 kHz and 1.7 kHz (or more). To program the
proper repeater shift, use Menu items “MODE-FM 060
RPT SHIFT(28 MHz)” and “MODE-FM 061 RPT
SHIFT(50 MHz),” as appropriate.
MODE Switch
MAIN Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
CTCSS Operation
tn: Tone Encoder
tS: Tone Squelch
oFF: OFF
CTCSS Tone Frequency
67.0
88.5
114.8
151.4
177.3
203.5
250.3
69.3
91.5
118.8
156.7
179.9
206.5
254.1
Repeater Shift Direction
S: Simplex
--: Minus Shift
+: Plus Shift
CTCSS Tone Frequency (Hz)
71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5
94.8 97.4 100.0 103.5 107.2
123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3
159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3
183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6
210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6
85.4
110.9
146.2
173.8
199.5
241.8
You may also use “Tone Squelch” whereby your receiver will be kept silent until an incoming signal bearing a
matching CTCSS tone is receiver. Your receiver's squelch will then open in response to the reception of the required
tone.
1. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to the
output frequency (downlink) from the repeater.
2. Press and hold in the FM Mode key (# ) for
two seconds to engage the CTCSS mode.
3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to choose “ts.”
The available choices are
“OFF”
“tn” “ts” “OFF.”
4. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select
the desired CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50
standard CTCSS tones are provided (see the
CTCSS Tone Chart).
5. Press and hold in the FM Mode key for two seconds. On the display, just below the “1 Hz” frequency digit, a small “d” will indicate that the Tone
Decoder is engaged.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MAIN Tuning Dial
MODE Switch
Tone Squelch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Tone Decoder
C T C S S To n e
Frequency
Page 95
CONVENIENT MEMORY FUNCTIONS
The FT DX 9000 Contest contains ninety-nine regular memories, labeled 01 through 99, nine special programmed limit
memory pairs, labeled P-1L/1U through P-9L/9U, and five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories, labeled C1 ~ C5. Each
stores various settings, not only the VFO-A frequency and mode (See below). By default, the 99 regular memories are
contained in one group; however, they can be arranged in up to six separate groups, if desired.
Quick Point
The FT DX 9000 Contest’s memory channels store the following data (not just the operating frequency):
Frequency
Mode
Clarifier status and its Offset Frequency
ANT status
IPO status
Roofing filter status and its Bandwidth
Noise Blanker status
CONTOUR status and its Peak Frequency
DSP Noise Reduction (DNR) status and its Reduction algorithm selection.
DSP Notch filter (NTCH) status
NAR bandwidth status
DSP Auto Notch filter (DNF) status
Repeater Shift Direction and Shift Frequency
CTCSS status and Tone Frequency
Memory channels may be grouped into as many as six convenient batches, for easy identification and selection. For example, you might want to set aside memory groups for AM BC stations, shortwave broadcast stations, contest frequencies,
repeater frequencies, and PMS limits, or any other groupings you like.
Each memory group is capable of holding up to 22 memory channels (the Group size is fixed). When a memory channel is
grouped, the channel numbers change to correspond to the chart below:
99
P-9L/9U
P-8L/8U
98
03
P-3L/3U
02
P-2L/2U
01
P-1L/1U
General
Purpose
Memories
C-1
PMS
Memories
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
QMB QMB QMB QMB QMB
Memories
Memories
Memories
Memories
Memories
Page 96
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
QMB (QUICK MEMORY BANK)
The Quick Memory Bank is comprised of five memories (labeled C1 ~ C5) independent from the regular and PMS memories. These can quickly store operating parameters for later recall.
QMB CHANNEL STORAGE
1. Tune to the desired frequency on the VFO-A.
2. Press the blue (QMB) STO key (# ). The “beep”
will confirm that the contents of the VFO-A have been
written to the currently-available QMB memory.
If you repeatedly press the (QMB) STO key, the QMB
memories will be written in the following order:
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
QMB STO key
C-1
Once all five QMB memories have data on them, previous
data (starting with channel C1) will be over-written on a
first-in, first-out basis.
QMB CHANNEL RECALL
1. Press the (QMB) RCL key (# ). The display will
indicate “QMB” and the current QMB channel’s data
will be shown on the main frequency display field.
2. Repeatedly pressing the (QMB) RCL key will toggle
you through the QMB channels:
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-1
Advice
You may change the QMB channel’s frequency by rotating the Main Tuning Dial (# ) (Memory Tune Operation, described details on page 101).
QMB RCL key
“
” will replace “
” in the multi-panel window, indicating you are in the “Memory Tune” mode.
During Memory Tune operation, you may change operating modes,
and engage and offset the Clarifier, if desired.
Press the V/M switch momentarily to return to the originallymemorized frequency of the current memory channel. One more
press of the V/M key will return you to VFO operation.
QMB is a very convenient means of storing and recalling
memories, if you only have recourse to a few. With one
tough of the (QMB) RCL key, the frequency data will
appear instantly as though you were operating on the VFOA.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 97
MEMORY GROUPS
MEMORY GROUP ASSIGNMENT
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select Menu
item “GENERAL 031 MEM GROUP.”
Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to set this
Menu item to “ENABLE” (the default setting is “DISABLE”).
3. Press and hold in the MNU key for two seconds to
save the new setting and exit. Operation will now be
restricted to the six Memory Groups.
To cancel Memory Group operation, repeat steps (1)
through (3) above, choosing “DISABLE” in step (2).
Advice
Note that for the PMS memory group, the PMS memories
“P1L” through “P9U” will be so designated, so as to avoid
confusion.
MNU key
MAIN Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Memory Channel Number
Groups Memory “OFF”
Groups Memory “ON”
01 ~ 19
1-01 ~ 1-19
20 ~ 39
2-01 ~ 2-20
40 ~ 59
3-01 ~ 3-20
60 ~ 79
4-01 ~ 4-20
80 ~ 99
5-01 ~ 5-20
P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U
P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U
CHOOSING THE DESIRED MEMORY GROUP
You may recall memories just within a particular Memory Group, if desired.
1. Press the V/M key (# ), if necessary, to enter the
Memory mode.
2. Press and hold in the MCH/GRP key (# ) (below
and to the left of the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ))
for two seconds. The imbedded LED inside the switch
will light up.
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob to select the desired
Memory Group.
V/M key
MCH/GRP switch
To exit from Memory Group operation, press and hold in
the MCH/GRP key for two seconds once more.
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Advice
You will now be operating using memories only within
the selected Memory Group.
If no channels have been assigned to a particular
Memory Group, you will not have access to that Group.
Page 98
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
The memory system of the FT DX 9000 Contest allows storage and recall of up to 99 memories, each storing frequency,
mode, and a wide variety of status information detailed previously. Memories may be grouped into as many as six Memory
Groups, and additionally you get nine pairs of band-limit (PMS) memories along with five QMB (Quick Memory Bank)
memories.
MEMORY STORAGE
1. Set the VFO-A up with all frequency, mode, and status the way you want to have it stored.
2. Press the AXM button (# ) momentarily (the current channel number will start blinking); the contents
of the current memory channel will be shown on the
VFO-B display field.
3. Press the MCH/GRP key (# ) momentarily.
When you press the MCH/GRP key, the Red LED
imbedded within the switch should light up, indicating that you are ready to choose a channel into which
to store the data.
Advice
A
M key
V/M key
MCH/GRP switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
If the Red LED imbedded in the MCH/GRP switch does
not light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right
of the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) is not illuminated. It is,
press the A/B switch to make it go out, then press the MCH/
GRP] key again.
4. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select the
memory channel onto which you wish to store the data.
If you have selected a channel on which data is already stored, that frequency will appear on the VFOB’s frequency display field.
5. Press and hold in the AXM key for two seconds to
store the frequency and other data into the selected
memory channel. A double beep will confirm that you
have held the AXM key in long enough.
MEMORY CHANNEL RECALL
1
Press the V/M switch (# ), if necessary, to enter
the Memory mode. A memory channel number will
appear in the multi-panel window.
2. Press the MCH/GRP key (# ) momentarily.
The Red LED inside the switch will light up, indicating that you are ready to recall a memory channel.
Advice
If the Red LED imbedded in the MCH/GRP key does not
light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of
the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) is not illuminated. It is, press
the A/B switch (# ) to make it go out, then press the
MCH/GRP key again.
V/M key
MCH/GRP switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
3. After pressing the MCH/GRP key, you may rotate
the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select the desired
memory channel.
Advice
To work within a particular Memory Group, press and hold
in the MCH/GRP key for two seconds. The imbedded
LED will glow Orange; now press the MCH/GRP key
momentarily, and the LED will change to Red; you many
now choose the channel within the selected Memory Group.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 99
MEMORY OPERATION
MEMORY CHANNEL RECALL
Checking a Memory Channel’s Status
Before programming a channel into memory, you can check the current contents of that channel without the danger of
over-writing the data accidentally.
switch
1. Press the MCH/GRP key (# ) momentarily.
The imbedded LED will glow Red, indicating that
you are now ready to view memory channel contents.
Advice
If the Red LED imbedded in the MCH/GRP key does not
light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of
the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) is not illuminated. It is, press
the A/B switch to make it go out, then press the MCH/
GRP key again.
2. Press the AXM key (# ).
The data stored in the currently-selected memory
channel will be displayed in the VFO-B frequency
field. However, since you are only checking the contents of the memory channel, your radio will not
have moved to the memory channel’s frequency.
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select
other memory channels. To exit from the Memory
Check mode, press the AXM key once more.
MCH/GRP switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Advice
While the Memory Check function is engaged, the
memory channel number will blink.
While operating in the VFO mode, using Memory
Check, you may store the current contents of the VFO
into the selected memory by pressing and holding in
the AXM key for two seconds (until the double
beep). Conversely, if you wish to write the contents
of the current memory into the VFO-A register, press
and hold in the MXA key (# ) for two seconds.
ERASING MEMORY CHANNEL DATA
1. Press the MCH/GRP key (# ) momentarily. The
imbedded LED will glow Red, indicating that you are
now ready to view memory channel contents.
Advice
LOCK switch
If the Red LED imbedded in the MCH/GRP key does not
light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of
the CLAR/VFO-B knob (#
) is not illuminated. It is, press
the A/B switch to make it go out, then press the MCH/
GRP key again.
switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
2. Press the AXM key (# ).
The data stored in the currently-selected memory channel will be displayed in the VFO-B frequency field.
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select the
memory channel that you would like to erase.
4. Press the LOCK switch (# ) to erase the contents
of the selected memory channel.
Advice
After erasure, only the memory channel number will
remain; the frequency data will disappear from the
display.
If you make a mistake and wish to restore the memory’s
contents, just repeat steps (1) through (3) above.
Page 100
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
MOVING MEMORY DATA TO THE VFO-A
You may transfer the contents of the currently-selected memory channel into the VFO-A register, if you like.
1. Press the V/M switch (# ), as necessary, to go to
the Memory mode. The memory channel number will
appear in the multi-panel window.
2. Press the MCH/GRP key (# ) momentarily.
The Red LED inside the switch will light up, indicating that you are ready to recall a memory channel.
Advice
If the Red LED imbedded in the MCH/GRP key does not light
up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of the CLAR/
VFO-B knob (# ) is not illuminated. It is, press the A/B switch
to make it go out, then press the MCH/GRP key again.
switch
V/M switch
MCH/GRP switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select the
memory channel the contents of which you wish to
transfer to the VFO-A.
4. Press and hold in the MXA switch (# ) for two
seconds, until you hear the double beep. The data in
the selected memory channel will now be transferred
to the VFO-A.
Advice
This transfer of data to the VFO-A does not affect the original contents of the memory channel; this is a “copy” function that leaves the memory contents unchanged.
Memory Tune Operation
You may freely tune off of any memory channel in a “Memory tune” mode that is similar to VFO operation. So long
as you do not over-write the contents of the current memory, Memory tune operation will not alter the contents of the
memory channel.
1. Press the V/M switch (# ) to recall any memory
channel.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ); you will now
observe that the memory channel’s frequency is
changing.
“
” will replace “
” in the multi-panel window,
indicating you are in the “Memory Tune” mode.
During Memory Tune operation, you may change operating modes, and engage and offset the Clarifier, if desired.
Press the V/M switch momentarily to return to the originally-memorized frequency of the current memory channel. One more press of the V/M switch will return you
to VFO operation.
V/M switch
Main Tuning Dial
Note
Computer software programs utilizing the CAT system interface port may presume that the transceiver is operating in
the VFO mode for certain features like “band mapping” and/or frequency logging. Because the “Memory Tune”
mode so closely resembles the VFO mode, be sure that you have the FT DX 9000 Contest operating in a control mode
compatible with your software’s requirements. Use the VFO mode if you’re not sure.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 101
OPERATION ON ALASKA EMERGENCY FREQUENCY: 5167.5 KHZ (U.S. VERSION ONLY)
Section 97.401(d) of the regulations governing amateur radio in the United States permit emergency amateur communications on the spot frequency of 5167.5 kHz by stations in (or within 92.6 km of) the state of Alaska. This frequency is only
to be used when the immediate safety of human life and/or property are threatened, and is never to be used for routine
communications.
The FT DX 9000 Contest includes the capability for transmission and reception on 5167.5 kHz under such emergency
conditions via the Menu system. To activate this feature:
V/M switch
1. Press the MNU (# ) key.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to select
“TX GNRL 160 EMERGENCY FREQ TX.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) select “ENABLE.”
4. Press and hold in the MNU key for two second to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
Emergency communication on this spot frequency is
now possible.
5. Press the V/M switch (# ), as necessary, to enter
the Memory mode, then rotate the CLAR/VFO-B
knob to select the emergency channel (M-EMG),
which is found between channels “P-9U” and “01.”
MNU key
MCH/GRP switch
CLAR/VFO-B knob
Note that the receive-mode CLARIFIER functions normally while using this frequency, but variation of the transmit frequency is not possible. Activation of “TX GNRL 160 EMERGENCY FREQ TX” does not enable any other out-ofamateur-band capability on the transceiver. The full specifications of the FT DX 9000 Contest are not necessarily guaranteed
on this frequency, but power output and receiver sensitivity should be fully satisfactory for the purpose of emergency
communication.
If you wish to disable operation capability on the Alaska Emergency Frequency, repeat the above procedures, but set “TX
GNRL 160 EMERGENCY FREQ TX” to “DISABLE” in step 3.
In an emergency, note that a half-wave dipole cut for this frequency should be approximately 45’3” on each leg (90’6” total
length). Emergency operation on 5167.5 kHz is shared with the Alaska-Fixed Service. This transceiver is not authorized for
operation, under the FCC’s Part 87, for aeronautical communications.
Page 102
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
OPERATION ON THE 60-METER BAND (U.S. VERSION)
The recently-released 60-meter band is covered, in the FT DX 9000 Contest, by five special, fixed memory channels. These
channels are set to USB, and they appear between the “last” PMS channel (“P9U”) and the first “regular” memory channel
(Channel 1).
The five channels are:
Channel Number
Frequency
US1
5.332.000 MHz
US2
5.348.000 MHz
US3
5.368.000 MHz
US4
5.373.000 MHz
US5
5.405.000 MHz
V/M switch
To operate on the 60-meter band channels, press the
V/M switch (# ), if necessary, to enter the Memory
mode, then rotate CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select
the desired channel from the above selections.
Be sure to observe all current regulations regarding Effective Radiated Power (E.R.P.) while operating on the 60meter band.
CLAR/VFO-B knob
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 103
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
You may scan wither the VFO or the memories of the FT DX 9000 Contest, and the radio will halt the scan on any station
with a signal strong enough to open the receiver’s squelch.
VFO SCANNING
1. Set the (RX) VFO to the frequency on which you
would like to begin scanning.
2. Rotate the SQL control (# ) so that the background noise is just silenced.
3. Press and hold in the microphone’s UP or DOWN
key for 2 second to start scanning in the specified direction.
SQL knob
If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the decimal point
between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the frequency display will blink.
If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will resume in
about five seconds.
On the SSB/CW and SSB-based Data modes, the scanner will
pause on a received signal, then will step across the signal
very slowly, giving you time to stop the scan, if you like. In
these modes on the VFO, the scanner does not stop, however.
MAIN Tuning Dial
MEMORY SCAN
1. Set the transceiver up in the memory mode by pressing the V/M switch (# ), if necessary.
2. Rotate the SQL control (# ) so that the background noise is just silenced.
3. Press and hold in the microphone’s UP or DOWN
key for 2 second to start scanning in the specified direction.
If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the decimal point
between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the frequency display will blink.
If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will resume in
about five seconds.
Advice
During Memory Group operation, only the channels
within the current Memory Group will be scanned.
If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the
microphone’s UP or DOWN key will cause scanning to resume instantly.
If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scanning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT
switch during scanning will not cause transmission,
however.
You may select the manner in which the scanner resumes while it has paused on a signal, using Menu
item “GENERAL 037 MIC SCAN RESUME.” During memory scanning, the default “TIME” setting will
cause the scanner to resume scanning after five seconds; you may change it, however, to resume only after the carrier has dropped out, if you like See page
119.
Page 104
V/M switch
SQL knob
MAIN Tuning Dial
Quick Point
If you have no interest in scanning, and wish to prohibit
the microphone’s UP / DOWN keys from initiating
scanning, you may disable scanning control from the microphone using Menu Item “GENERAL 036 MIC
SCAN” (set it to “DISABLE”).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
PMS
To limit scanning (and manual tuning) within a particular frequency range, you can use the Programmable Memory Scanning (PMS) feature, which utilizes nine special-purpose memory pairs (“P-1L/P-1U” through “P-9L/P-9U”). The PMS
feature is especially useful in helping you to observe any operating sub-band limits which apply to your Amateur license
class.
1. Store the Lower and Upper tuning/scanning limit frequencies into the memory pair “P1L” and “P1U,” respectively, or any other “L/U” pair of memories in the
special PMS memory area. See page 99 for details
regarding memory storage.
2. Press the V/M switch (# ) to enter the Memory
mode.
3. Press the MCH/GRP key (# ) momentarily.
When you press the MCH/GRP key, the Red LED
imbedded within the switch should light up, indicating that you are ready to choose a channel into which
to store the data.
Advice
V/M switch
SQL knob
MCH/GRP switch
Main Tuning Dial
CLAR/VFO-B knob
If the Red LED imbedded in the MCH/GRP key does not
light up, check to be sure that the orange lamp to the right of
the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) is not illuminated. It is, press
the A/B switch to make it go out, then press the MCH/
GRP key again.
4. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to select
memory channel “P1L” or “P1U.”
5. Rotate the SQL control (# ) so that the background noise is just silenced.
6. Turn the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) slightly (to
activate memory tuning). Tuning and scanning are now
limited to the range within the P1L/P1U limits until
you press the V/M switch to return to memory channel or VFO-A operation.
7. Press and hold in the microphone’s UP or DOWN
key for 2 second to start scanning in the specified direction.
If the scanner halts on an incoming signal, the decimal point
between the “MHz” and “kHz” digits of the frequency display will blink.
If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will resume in
about five seconds.
On the SSB/CW and SSB-based Data modes, the scanner will
pause on a received signal, then will step across the signal
very slowly, giving you time to stop the scan, if you like. In
these modes on the VFO, the scanner does not stop, however.
If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the microphone's
UP or DOWN key will cause scanning to resume instantly.
If you rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob in the opposite
direction from the current scanning direction (in other words,
you rotate the dial to the left when scanning toward a higher
frequency), the direction of the scan will reverse.
If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scanning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT switch
during scanning will not cause transmission, however.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 105
PACKET OPERATION
Packet operation is easily accomplished on the FT DX 9000 Contest by connecting your TNC (Terminal Node Controller)
to the transceiver, per the illustration. “Packet” operation also applies to SSB-based AFSK data modes, such as PSK31, etc.
2
1
PTT
PACKET
②
④ ⑤
① ③
PACKET JACK
TNC
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
DATA OUT
GND
PTT
DATA IN
(SQL Control)
1
2
3
4
5
DATA
OUT
DATA
IN
PACKET SETUP (INCLUDING SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY)
Before operation can commence, some basic setup procedures must be performed, using the Menu, to configure
your radio for the data mode to be used.
Menu Mode
MODE-PKT 062 PKT DISP
MODE-PKT 063 PKT GAIN
MODE-PKT 064 PKT SHIFT
Setup
0Hz
128
1000Hz
BASIC SETUP
1. Press the PKT Mode switch (#
).
For HF operation, SSB-based Data operation is generally used.
One press of the PKT switch will engage Packet operation
in the “LSB” mode (by default). Both the “PKT” and “LSB”
LEDs will become illuminated.
If you need to do FM-based 1200-baud packet on the 29/50
MHz bands, press the PKT switch once more to engage the
“PKT-FM” mode. The “PKT” and “FM” LEDs will both become illuminated.
2. When the “transmit” command is received from the
TNC, the transmitter of the FT DX 9000 Contest will
automatically be engaged. Likewise, the command to
return to receive will cause the radio to revert to the
receive mode.
If you need to adjust the output level from the radio from the
“DATA OUT” pin of the PACKET jack (pin 4), please do
so at the TNC side. For the input level from the TNC, as applied to the DATA IN pin of the PACKET jack (pin 1), please
use Menu item “No.063 MODE-PKT PKT GAIN.”
During Packet operation via the rear panel’s PACKET jack,
the front and rear panel MIC jacks are both cut off, so you
won’t have a “live microphone” problem during data operation.
Page 106
Note
If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than
a few minutes, we recommend that you use the RF PWR
control (# ) to reduce the transmitter power to 1/2 ~ 1/3
of its normal maximum.
Quick Point
PACKET Jack Specifications
DATA IN (Pin 1)
Input Level: 17mVrms
Input Impedance: 10 kOhms
DATA OUT (Pin 4)
Fixed level, does not respond to setting of AF GAIN
or SQL control.)
Output Level: 700 mVp-p max.
Output Impedance: 10 kOhms
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
RTTY (RADIO TELETYPE) OPERATION
Most RTTY operation today is accomplished using a TNC or other computer-based system that utilizes AFSK tones. As
such, the previous discussion on LSB-mode “Packet” operation will apply for Baudot operation, as well. For RTTY operation using a Terminal Unit (TU) or the “FSK” output from a TNC, please see the discussion below. See also the illustration
for details regarding connection to your TU.
2
1
PTT
RTTY
② ③
① ④
RTTY JACK
RTTY Machine
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
AF IN
PTT
GND
FSK OUT
1
2
3
4
FSK OUT
AF IN
SETTING UP FOR RTTY OPERATION
Before commencing RTTY operation, please direct your
attention to the setup steps below.
Menu Mode
MODE-RTY 065 POLARITY-R
MODE-RTY 066 POLARITY-T
MODE-RTY 067 RTTY SHIFT
MODE-RTY 068 RTTY TONE
Setup
NOR/REV
NOR/REV
170Hz
2125Hz
BASIC SETUP
1. Press the RTTY Mode switch (#
RTTY mode.
) to enter the
One press of the RTTY Mode switch will engage RTTY
operation using “LSB” injection, which is generally used in
the Amateur service. In this mode, both the “RTTY” and “LSB”
LEDs will light up.
To switch to USB-side injection in RTTY, press the RTTY
mode switch once more. Both the “RTTY” and “USB” LEDs
will now be illuminated. Repeatedly pressing the RTTY button will toggle between LSB and USB injection on RTTY.
2. When you begin typing on your TU or computer keyboard, the command to transmit should automatically
be sent to the transceiver, causing it to enter the transmit mode.
Note
If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer
than a few minutes, we recommend that you use the
RF PWR control (# ) to reduce the transmitter
power to 1/2 ~ 1/3 of its normal maximum.
Advice
There is no adjustment of the receiver output level
from Pin 2 (“RX OUT”) of the RTTY jack on the
rear panel; please make any needed level adjustments
at the TU side.
The Mark/Space Shift utilized in most Amateur RTTY
operation is 170 Hz. Other shifts may be configured,
however, using Menu item “MODE-RTY 067 RTTY
SHIFT.”
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
The FT DX 9000 Contest is set up for “high tone” operation (centered on 2125 Hz) by default, but you may
configure it for low tone (1275 Hz) operation using
Menu item “MODE-RTY 068 RTTY TONE.”
You may find that you are unable to decode some
RTTY stations, even if they are of sufficient signal
strength. If this is observed, there may be a Mark/Space
polarity problem between your station and the other
station. If so, try setting Menu item “MODE-RTY 065
POLARITY-R” to “REV” (“Reverse”) to see if that
permits copy. A separate Menu item permits reversal
of your transmitter's Mark/Space polarity: “MODERTY 066 POLARITY-T.”
Quick Point
In the FT DX 9000 Contest, “RTTY” is a mode defined as
being an “FSK” mode, whereby the closing and opening
of a keying line (to ground) causes the Mark/Space tones
to alternate. The RTTY mode is not an AFSK based mode
in this transceiver, and the AFSK output tones from a TNC
will not cause Mark/Space shifting to occur. Use the
“Packet” mode for AFSK-based Baudot and other data
modes.
Page 107
MISCELLANEOUS AFSK-BASED DATA MODES
The FT DX 9000 Contest may also me used for a host of other SSB-based Data modes. Please set up your system using the
illustration as a guideline.
A
B
2
1
PACKET
②
④ ⑤
① ③
PACKET PTT
GND
DATA OUT
DATA IN
LINE IN or MIC IN
LINE OUT or MIC OUT
COM PROT
Quick Point
When you have configured Menu item “TX GNRL 159
VOX SELECT” to “DATA,” the transceiver will operate
in a “VOX” mode, and it is not necessary to connect a
“PTT” line. This makes for very convenient interfacing to
computer Sound Cards, etc.
Page 108
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
ABOUT THE TRANSVERTER OUTPUT TERMINAL
You may connect an after-market transverter to the rear panel’s TRV (Transverter) jack. The output, at 28 MHz, is approximately –20 dBm (0.01 mW) at 50 Ohms.
V/UHF
Antenna
50Ω)
Coaxial同軸ケーブル(
Cable (50 Ohm)
Transceiver
V/U ANT
RF IN TX GND
Pin 2 (TX GND) of BAND DATA 1Jack or
Pin 2 (TX GND) of BAND DATA 2 Jack
TRV Jack
SETUP
OPERATION
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to enter the Menu mode
(the LCD will change to Menu display).
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to choose
Menu item “TUNING 135 MY BAND.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to find the
Menu parameter “TRV OFF” (this is the factory default setting).
4. Press the ENT key (# ) to change the parameter
to “TRV ON” (this will add this condition to your “My
Band” list; see page 55.
5. Press and hold in the MNU key for at least two
seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
1. Set up the frequency offset for transverter use, as described previously.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (# ) to set the
desired operating frequency. Operation is basically unchanged from normal transceiver operation.
Advice
When the “TRV” mode is turned on, power output will
not be allowed to pass to the [ANT1] ~ [ANT4] main antenna jacks. So one of these may be connected to your
transverter’s “RX” jack. Just be certain to disconnect the
transverter when returning to HF operation, as the selected
Antenna jack will now be capable of passing RF power.
Setting the Transverter Frequency Offset
You may set up the frequency display so that it shows the actual band on which your transverter is operating (instead
of the “IF” used by the transverter, which is the 28 MHz band on your FT DX 9000Contest).
Example: Setting Up the FT DX 9000 Contest Display for Use with a 144 MHz Transverter
1. Connect the 144 MHz transverter to the transceiver.
2. Use the Menu mode to confirm that Menu item
“GENERAL 035 TRV OFFSET” is set to “44”
(the factory default setting).
3. Press the BAND/MHz key (# ) momentarily,
then rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) so as
to select “44.000000” on the display.
4. Press and hold in the MNU key (# ) for at least
two seconds to save the new setting and exit.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
The “100 MHz” digit of the frequency is not displayed,
so when you are operating on 2 meters and see “45
MHz” on the frequency readout, this indicates “145
MHz” instead.
Advice
With the setup described above, tuning the operating
range 28-29 MHz will correspond to an actual operating frequency of 144-145 MHz, with “44-45” being displayed on the front panel of the transceiver.
Page 109
MENU MODE
The Menu system of the FT DX 9000 Contest provides extensive customization capability, so you can set up your transceiver just the way you want to operate it. The Menu items are grouped by general utilization category, and are numbered
from “AGC 1” to “TX GNRL 160.”
USING THE MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the MNU key (# ) momentarily. The Menu
list will appear on the LCD display, and you will see
the Menu Number, Menu Groups, Menu Items, and
the current settings for each item displayed on the
LCD display.
Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select the
Menu item you wish to work on.
Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) to change the
current setting of the selected Menu item.
When you have finished making your adjustments,
press and hold in the MNU key (# ) for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. If you only momentarily press the MNU key
(# ), the new settings will not be retained.
MAIN Dial Knob
MNU key
CLAR/VFO-B Knob
Menu Number Æ
Å Menu Group
Å Menu Item
Å Menu Setting
Menu Mode Reset
You may reset all the Menu settings to their original factory defaults, if desired.
1. Turn the front panel POWER switch (# ) off.
2. Press and hold in the MNU key (# ), and while holding it in, press the POWER switch (#
transceiver back on. Now release the MNU key (# ).
Page 110
) to turn the
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
Groupe
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
DISPLAY
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
Menu Function
MAIN-FAST-DELAY
MAIN-FAST-HOLD
MAIN-MID-DELAY
MAIN-MID-HOLD
MAIN-SLOW-DELAY
MAIN-SLOW-HOLD
SUB-FAST-DELAY
SUB-FAST-HOLD
SUB-MID-DELAY
SUB-MID-HOLD
SUB-SLOW-DELAY
SUB-SLOW-HOLD
TFT COLOR
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
FH-2 SET
FH-2 SET
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
DIMMER-METER
DIMMER-VFD
BAR DISPLAY SELECT
ROTATOR START UP
ROTATOR OFFSET ADJ
RIGHT TX METER
QMB MARKER
BEACON TIME
CONTEST NUMBER
FH-2 SET
FH-2 SET
FH-2 SET
FH-2 SET
FH-2 SET
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
MODE-AM
MODE-AM
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
MODE-CW
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
CW MEMORY 1
CW MEMORY 2
CW MEMORY 3
CW MEMORY 4
CW MEMORY 5
ANT SELECT
BEEP LEVEL
CAT RATE
MEM GROUP
QUICK SPLIT FREQ
TIME OUT TIMER
TRV OFFSET
μ-TUNE DIAL STEP
MIC SCAN
MIC SCAN RESUME
AF/RF DIAL SWAP
AM MIC GAIN
AM MIC SELECT
F-KEYER TYPE
F-CW KEYER
R-KEYER TYPE
R-CW KEYER
CW AUTO MODE
CW BFO
CW BK-IN
CW WAVE SHAPE
CW WEIGHT
CW FREQ DISPLAY
PC KEYING
QSK
FT DX 9000 CONTEST
Available Values
20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec Step)
0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec Step)
20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec Step)
0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec Step)
20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec Step)
0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec Step)
20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec Step)
0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec Step)
20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec Step)
0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec Step)
20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec Step)
0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec Step)
COOL BLUE / CONTRAST BLUE /
FLASH WHITE / CONTRAST UMBER /
UMBER
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 15
CLAR / CW TUNE / VRF·μTUNE / NOTCH
0 / 90 / 180 / 270 (°)
–30 ~ 0
ALC / VDD
ENABLE / DISABLE
OFF / 1 ~ 255 sec
1290 / AUNO / AUNT / A2NO / A2NT /
12NO / 12NT
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
BAND / STACK
0 ~ 255
4800 / 9600 / 38400 bps
ENABLE / DISABLE
–20 ~ 0 ~ 20 kHz (1kHz Step)
OFF / 5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 25 / 30 min
30 ~ 49 MHz
DIAL STEP-2 / DIAL STEP-1 / OFF
ENABLE / DISABLE
PAUSE / TIME
NORMAL / SWAP
MCVR / 0 ~ 255
FRONT / REAR / DATA / PC
OFF / BUG / ELEKEY / ACS
NOR / REV
OFF / BUG / ELEKEY / ACS
NOR / REV
OFF / 50M / ON
USB / LSB / AUTO
SEMI / FULL
1 / 2 / 4 / 6 msec
2.5 ~ 4.5
DIRECT FREQ / PITCH OFFSET
ENABLE / DISABLE
15 / 20 / 25/ 30 msec
Default Setting
300 msec
0 msec
700 msec
0 msec
2000 msec
0 msec
300 msec
0 msec
700 msec
0 msec
2000 msec
0 msec
*
4
8
CW TUNE
0 (°)
0
ALC
ENABLE
OFF
1290
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BAND
50
4800 bps
DISABLE
5 kHz
OFF
44 MHz
DIAL STEP-1
ENABLE
TIME
NORMAL
160
FRONT
ELEKEY
NOR
ELEKEY
NOR
OFF
USB
SEMI
4 msec
3.0
PITCH OFFSET
DISABLE
15 msec
*: Unmber Display Color: UNMBER, Light Blue Display Color: COOL BLUE
OPERATION MANUAL
Page 111
MENU MODE
Groupe
MODE-DAT
MODE-DAT
MODE-DAT
MODE-DAT
MODE-DAT
MODE-FM
MODE-FM
MODE-FM
MODE-FM
MODE-PKT
MODE-PKT
MODE-PKT
MODE-RTY
MODE-RTY
MODE-RTY
MODE-RTY
MODE-SSB
MODE SSB
No.
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
Menu Function
DATA IN SELECT
DATA GAIN
DATA OUT
DATA VOX DELAY
DATA VOX GAIN
FM MIC GAIN
FM MIC SELECT
RPT SHIFT(28MHz)
RPT SHIFT(50MHz)
PKT DISP
PKT GAIN
PKT SHIFT
POLARITY-R
POLARITY-T
RTTY SHIFT
RTTY TONE
SSB MIC SELECT
SSB-TX-BPF
MODE-SSB
MODE-SSB
MODE-SSB
MODE-SSB
RX AUDIO
RX AUDIO
RX AUDIO
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
LSB RX-CARRIER
LSB TX-CARRIER
USB RX-CARRIER
USB TX-CARRIER
AGC-SLOPE
HEADPHONE MIX
SPEAKER OUT
MAIN-CONTOUR-LEVEL
MAIN-CONTOUR-WIDTH
SUB-CONTOUR-LEVEL
SUB-CONTOUR-WIDTH
IF-NOTCH-WIDTH
MAIN-CW-SHAPE
MAIN-CW-SLOPE
MAIN-CW-NARROW
MAIN-PSK-SHAPE
MAIN-PSK-SLOPE
MAIN-PSK-NARROW
MAIN-RTTY-SHAPE
MAIN-RTTY-SLOPE
MAIN-RTTY-NARROW
MAIN-SSB-SHAPE
MAIN-SSB-SLOPE
MAIN-SSB-NARROW
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
RX DSP
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
SUB-CW-SHAPE
SUB-CW-SLOPE
SUB-CW-NARROW
SUB-PSK-SHAPE
SUB-PSK-SLOPE
SUB-PSK-NARROW
SUB-RTTY-SHAPE
SUB-RTTY-SLOPE
SUB-RTTY-NARROW
SUB-SSB-SHAPE
SUB-SSB-SLOPE
Page 112
Available Values
DATA / PC
0 ~ 255
VFO-a / VFO-b
30 ~ 3000 msec
0 ~ 255
MCVR / 0 ~ 255
FRONT / REAR / DATA / PC
0 ~ 1000 kHz (10 kHz Step)
0 ~ 4000 kHz (10 kHz Step)
–3000 ~ 0 ~ 3000Hz (10 Hz Step)
0 ~ 255
–3000 ~ 0 ~ 3000Hz (10 Hz Step)
NOR / REV
NOR / REV
170 / 200 / 425 / 850 Hz
1275 / 2125 Hz
FRONT / REAR / DATA / PC
50-3000 / 100-2900 / 200-2800 /
300-2700 / 400-2600 (Hz) / 3000WB
–200 ~ 0 ~ 200 Hz (10Hz Step)
–200 ~ 0 ~ 200 Hz (10Hz Step)
–200 ~ 0 ~ 200 Hz (10Hz Step)
–200 ~ 0 ~ 200 Hz (10Hz Step)
NORMAL / SLOPE
SEPARATE / COMBINE-1 / COMBINE-2
SEPARATE / COMBINE
–40 ~ 0 ~ 20
1 ~ 11
–40 ~ 0 ~ 20
1 ~ 11
NARROW / WIDE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
25 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
25 / 50 / 100/ 200 / 300 / 400 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM/GENTLE
25 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
200 / 400 / 600 / 850 / 1100 / 1350 / 1500 /
1650 / 1800 / 1950 / 2100 / 2250 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
25 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
25 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
25 / 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 (Hz)
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting
DATA
128
VFO-a
300 msec
128
128
FRONT
100 kHz
1000 kHz
0 Hz
128
1000 Hz
NOR
NOR
170 Hz
2125 Hz
FRONT
300-2700 (Hz)
0Hz
0Hz
0Hz
0Hz
NORMAL
COMBINE-2
COMBINE
–15
10
–15
10
WIDE
SHARP
MEDIUM
300 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
300 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
300 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
1800 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
300 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
300 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
300 (Hz)
SHARP
MEDIUM
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
Groupe
RX DSP
No. Menu Function
106 SUB-SSB-NARROW
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
SCOPE
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
TXAUDIO
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
137 F-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL
138 F-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH
139 F-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
140
141
142
143
144
145
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
146 R-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL
147 R-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH
148 R-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TXAUDIO
TX GNRL
149
150
151
152
153
154
MAIN FIX 1.8MHz
MAIN FIX 3.5MHz
MAIN FIX 5.0MHz
MAIN FIX 7.0MHz
MAIN FIX 10MHz
MAIN FIX 14MHz
MAIN FIX 18MHz
MAIN FIX 21MHz
MAIN FIX 24MHz
MAIN FIX 28MHz
MAIN FIX 50MHz
SUB FIX 1.8MHz
SUB FIX 3.5MHz
SUB FIX 5.0MHz
SUB FIX 7.0MHz
SUB FIX 10MHz
SUB FIX 14MHz
SUB FIX 18MHz
SUB FIX 21MHz
SUB FIX 24MHz
SUB FIX 28MHz
SUB FIX 50MHz
MAIN DIAL STEP
MAIN DIAL CW FINE
1MHz/100kHz SELECT
AM CH STEP
FM CH STEP
FM DIAL STEP
MY BAND
F-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ
F-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL
F-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH
F-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ
F-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
F-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH
R-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ
R-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL
R-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH
R-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ
R-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
R-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH
TX MAX POWER
Available Values
200 / 400 / 600 / 850 / 1100 / 1350 /
1500 / 1650 / 1800 / 1950 / 2100 /
2250 (Hz)
1800 ~ 1999 kHz
3500 ~ 3999 kHz
5250 ~ 5499 kHz
7000 ~ 7299 kHz
10100 ~ 10149 kHz
14000 ~ 14349 kHz
18000 ~ 18199 kHz
21000 ~ 21449 kHz
24800 ~ 24989 kHz
28000 ~ 29699 kHz
50000 ~ 53999 kHz
1800 ~ 1999 kHz
3500 ~ 3999 kHz
5250 ~ 5499 kHz
7000 ~ 7299 kHz
10100 ~ 10149 kHz
14000 ~ 14349kHz
18000 ~ 18199 kHz
21000 ~ 21449 kHz
24800 ~ 24989 kHz
28000 ~ 29699kHz
50000 ~ 53999 kHz
1 / 10 Hz
DISABLE / ENABLE
1MHz / 100kHz
2.5 / 5/ 9 / 10 / 12.5 kHz
5 / 6.25 / 10 / 12.5 / 25 kHz
10Hz / 100 Hz
1.8 ~ 50 (MHz) / GEN / TRV
OFF / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 / 500 /
600 / 700 (Hz)
–10 ~ 0 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 700 / 800 / 900 / 1000 / 1100 /
1200 / 1300 / 1400 / 1500 (Hz)
–10 ~ 0 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF/1500 ~ 3200 (100Hz Step)
–10 ~ 0 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 100 / 200 / 300 / 400 / 500 /
600 / 700 (Hz)
–10 ~ 0 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 700 / 800 / 900 / 1000 / 1100 /
1200 / 1300 / 1400 / 1500 (Hz)
–10 ~ 0 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 1500 ~ 3200 (Hz) (100Hz Step)
–10 ~ 0 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
10 /50 / 100 / 200 (W)
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Default Setting
1800 (Hz)
1800kHz
3500kHz
5250kHz
7000kHz
10100kHz
14000kHz
18068kHz
21000kHz
24890 kHz
28000 kHz
50000 kHz
1800 kHz
3500 kHz
5250 kHz
7000 kHz
10100 kHz
14000 kHz
18068 kHz
21000 kHz
24890 kHz
28000 kHz
50000 kHz
10 Hz
DISABLE
1 MHz
5 kHz
5 kHz
100 Hz
----OFF
5
10
OFF
5
10
OFF
5
10
OFF
5
10
OFF
5
10
OFF
5
10
200 (W)
Page 113
MENU MODE
Groupe
TX GNRL
TX GNRL
TX GNRL
TX GNRL
TX GNRL
TX GNRL
Page 114
No.
155
156
157
158
159
160
Menu Function
TX PWR CONTROL
EXT AMP TX-GND
EXT AMP TUNING PWR
FULL DUPLEX
VOX SELECT
EMERGENCY FREQ TX
Available Values
ALL MODE / CARRIER
ENABLE / DISABLE
10 /50 / 100 / 200 (W)
SIMP / DUP
MIC / DATA
DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting
ALL MODE
DISABLE
100 (W)
SIMP
MIC
DISABLE
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
AGC GROUP
001. MAIN-FAST-DELAY
007. SUB-FAST-DELAY
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC FAST mode
of the main band (VFO-A) receiver.
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 300 msec
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC FAST mode
of the sub band (VFO-B) receiver.
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 300 msec
Explanation: When the Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
is installed, once the input signal falls below the AGC
threshold, it is possible to configure the AGC decay
time in 20 ms steps.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
002. MAIN-FAST-HOLD
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for the AGC FAST mode of the main band (VFOA) receiver.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 0 msec
003.MAIN-MID-DELAY
008. SUB-FAST-HOLD
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for the AGC MID mode of the main band (VFO-A)
receiver.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 0 msec
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for the AGC FAST mode of the sub band (VFO-B)
receiver.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 0 msec
Explanation: When the Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
is installed, once the input signal falls below the AGC
threshold, it is possible to configure the AGC decay
time in 20 ms steps.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
005. MAIN-SLOW-DELAY
009. SUB-MID-DELAY
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC SLOW
mode of the main band (VFO-A) receiver.
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 2000 msec
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC MID mode
of the sub band (VFO-B) receiver.
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 700 msec
Explanation: When the Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
is installed, once the input signal falls below the AGC
threshold, it is possible to configure the AGC decay
time in 20 ms steps.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC MID mode
of the main band (VFO-A) receiver.
Available Values: 20 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 700 msec
004. MAIN-MID-HOLD
006. MAIN-SLOW-HOLD
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for the AGC SLOW mode of the main band (VFOA) receiver.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 0 msec
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 115
MENU MODE
AGC GROUP
DISPLAY GROUP
010. SUB-MID-HOLD
013. TFT COLOR
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for the AGC MID mode of the sub band (VFO-B)
receiver.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 0 msec
Explanation: When the Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
is installed, once the input signal falls below the AGC
threshold, it is possible to configure the AGC decay
time in 20 ms steps.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Selects the TFT color.
Available Values: COOL BLUE/CONTRAST BLUE/
FLASH WHITE/UMBER/CONTRAST UMBER
Default Setting: COOL BLUE
Explanation: When the optional TFT Display Unit
(TFT-9000) is installed, you may set the TFT display
color.
Advice: If the optional TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) is
not installed, this adjustment has no effect unless you
are using an external display in conjunction with the
optional Data Management Unit (DMU-9000).
011. SUB-SLOW-DELAY
014. DIMMER-METER
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC SLOW
mode of the sub band (VFO-B) receiver.
Available Values: 20 ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 2000 msec
Explanation: When the Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
is installed, once the input signal falls below the AGC
threshold, it is possible to configure the AGC decay
time in 20 ms steps.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
012. SUB-SLOW-HOLD
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for the AGC SLOW mode of the sub band (VFOB) receiver.
Available Values: 0 ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 0 msec
Explanation: When the Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
is installed, once the input signal falls below the AGC
threshold, it is possible to configure the AGC decay
time in 20 ms steps.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Page 116
Function: Setting of the meter brightness level when
“DIM” is selected.
Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Default Setting: 4
Explanation: The Dimmer may be used to set the
brightness level of the LCD and the analog meters.
Higher numerical values indicate more dimming (i.e. a
darker display). When the optional TFT Display Unit
(TFT-9000) is installed, the brightness level of the TFT
will also be affected by this adjustment.
015. DIMMER-VFD
Function: Setting of the frequency and TFT display
brightness level when “DIM” is selected.
Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Default Setting: 8
016. BAR DISPLAY SELECT
Function: Selects one of three parameters to be
viewed on the Tuning Offset Indicator.
Available Values: CLAR/CW TUNE/VRF-μTUNE/
NOTCH
Default Setting: CW TUNE
CLAR:
Displays relative clarifier offset.
CW TUNE: Displays relative tuning offset between
the incoming signal and transmitted frequency.
VRF-μTUNE: Displays the peak position of the VRF
or μTUNE filter.
NOTCH:
While you rotate the NOTCH knob,
the center frequency of the IF NOTCH
feature will be indicated.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
DISPLAY GROUP
FH-2 SETUP GROUP
017. ROTATOR START UP
021. BEACON TIME
Function: Selects the starting point of your controller’s
indicator needle.
Available Values: 0/90/180/270º
Default Setting: 0º
Function: Sets the interval time between repeats of
the beacon message.
Available Values: OFF/1 ~ 255 sec
Default Setting: OFF
018. ROTATOR OFFSET ADJ
022. CONTEST NUMBER
Function: Adjusts the indicator needle precisely to
the starting point set in menu selection 123.
Available Values: –30 - 0
Default Setting: 0
Function: Selects the Contest Number “Cut” format
for imbedded contest number.
Available Values: 1290/AUNO/AUNT/A2NO/A2NT/
12NO/12NT
Default Setting: 1290
1290: Does not abbreviate the Contest Number
AUNO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,”
“N” for “Nine,” and “O” for “Zero.”
AUNT: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,”
“N” for “Nine,” and “T” for “Zero.”
A2NO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,”
and “O” for “Zero.”
A2NT: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,”
and “T” for “Zero.”
12NO: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine” and “O” for
“Zero.”
12NT: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine” and “T” for
“Zero.”
019. RIGHT TX METER
Function: Selects the Sub meter function
Available Values: ALC/VDD
Default Setting: ALC
ALC: Indicates incoming signal strength on the sub
band (VFO-B) while receiving, and indicates the
ALC (Automatic Level Control) operating range
while transmitting.
VDD: Indicates the Vdd (final amplifier drain voltage)
at all times.
020. QMB MARKER
Function: Enables/Disable the QMB Maker (White
arrow “V”) to display on the Spectrum Band Scope.
Available Values: ENABLE/DISABLE
Default Setting: ENABLE
Advice: If the optional Data Management Unit (DMU9000) is not installed, this selection has no effect unless you are using an external display in conjunction
with the DMU-9000.
023. CW MEMORY 1
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 1.
Available Values: TEXT/MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from a
supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from
the CW keyer.
024. CW MEMORY 2
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 2.
Available Values: TEXT/MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from a
supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from
the CW keyer.
025. CW MEMORY 3
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 3.
Available Values: TEXT/MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from a
supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from
the CW keyer.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 117
MENU MODE
FH-2 SETUP GROUP
GENERAL GROUP
026. CW MEMORY 4
028. ANT SELECT
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 4.
Available Values: TEXT/MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from a
supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from
the CW keyer.
Function: Sets the method of antenna selection.
Available Values: BAND/STACK
Default Setting: BAND
BAND: The antenna is selected in accordance with
the operating band.
STACK: The antenna is selected in accordance with
the band stack (different antennas may be
utilized on the same band, if so selected in
the band stack).
027. CW MEMORY 5
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message register 5.
Available Values: TEXT/MESSAGE/COUNTUP
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from a
supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from
the CW keyer.
029. BEEP LEVEL
Function: Sets the beep level.
Available Values: 0 ~ 255
Default Setting: 50
030. CAT RATE
Function: Sets the transceiver’s computer-interface
circuitry for the CAT baud rate to be used.
Available Values: 4800/9600/38400 bps
Default Setting: 4800 bps
031. MEM GROUP
Function: Enables/Disables Memory Group Operation.
Available Values: DISABLE/ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
032. QUICK SPLIT FREQ
Function: Selects the tuning offset for the Quick Split
feature.
Available Values: –20 ~ 0 ~ +20 kHz (1 kHz Step)
Default Setting: +5 kHz
Explanation: When the front panel SPLIT key
(# ) is pushed for two seconds, VFO-B will be set to
the pro-programmed offset with respect to the VFO-A
frequency.
033. TIME OUT TIMER
Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time.
Available Values: OFF/5/10/15/20/25/30 min
Default Setting: OFF
The Time-Out Timer shuts off the transmitter after continuous transmission of the programmed time.
034. TRV OFFSET
Function: Set the 10’s and 1’s of the MHz digits display for operation with a transverter.
Available Values: 30 ~ 49 MHz
Default Setting: 44 MHz
If you connect a 430 MHz transverter to the radio, set
this menu to “30” (the “100 MHz” digits are hidden on
this radio).
Page 118
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
GENERAL GROUP
MODE-AM GROUP
035. μTUNE DIAL STEP
039. AM MIC GAIN
Function: Select the μ-TUNE mode.
Available Values: DIAL STEP-1/DIAL STEP-2/OFF
Default Setting: DIAL STEP-1
Explanation: If the RF μ-Tuning Unit is installed, the
installation may change the setting of this Menu item.
DIAL STEP-1: Activates the μ-TUNE system in the
Auto mode using “FINE” steps of the
μ-TUNE knob (1 step/click) on the 14
MHz and lower amateur bands on the
main band (VFO-A).
DIAL STEP-2: Activates the μ-TUNE system in the
Auto mode using “COARSE” steps of
the μ-TUNE knob (2 steps/click) on the
7 MHz and lower amateur bands. On
the 10/14 MHz bands, “FINE” μ-TUNE
knob steps will be used (1 step/click).
OFF:
Disables the μ-TUNE system. Activates the VRF feature on the 14 MHz
and lower amateur bands on the main
band (VFO-A).
Advice: If none of the RF μ-Tuning Units is installed,
changing this Menu setting will have no effect.
Function: Sets the microphone gain for the AM mode.
Available Values: MCVR/0 ~ 255 (FIX)
Default Setting: 160
When this menu is set to “MCVR,” you may adjust
the microphone gain using the front panel’s MIC knob.
036. MIC SCAN
Function: Enables/disables scanning access via the
microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys (only available at the
rear panel’s MIC Jack).
Available Values: ENABLE/DISABLE
Default Setting: ENABLE
040. AM MIC SELECT
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the
AM mode.
Available Values: FRONT/REAR/DATA/PC
Default Setting: FRONT
FRONT: Selects the microphone connected to the
front panel’s MIC jack while using the AM
mode.
REAR: Selects the microphone connected to the
rear panel’s MIC jack while using the AM
mode.
DATA: Selects the microphone connected to pin 1
of the PACKET Jack while using the AM
mode.
PC:
Selects the microphone connected to the
rear panel’s AUDIO IN 3.5-mm jack while
using the AM mode. The optional Data Management Unit (DMU-9000) is required for this
to be effective.
037. MIC SCAN RESUME
Function: Selects the Scan Resume mode.
Available Values: PAUSE/TIME
Default Setting: TIME
PAUSE: The scanner will hold until the signal disappears, then will resume after one second.
TIME: The scanner will hold for five seconds, then
resume whether or not the other station is
still transmitting.
038. AF/RF DIAL SWAP
Function: Reverses the functions of the AF GAIN
(VFO-B) and RF GAIN (VFO-A) knobs.
Available Values: NORMAL/SWAP
Default Setting: NORMAL
Explanation: When the optional Dual Receive Unit
(RXU-9000) is installed, you may swap the functions
of the RF and AF Gain controls for the Main and Sub
VFOs, so as to have both the Main and Sub VFOs’
AF Gain controls on the same shaft.
When this menu is set to “SWAP,” you may adjust
the sub (VFO-B) receiver audio using the large RF
GAIN (VFO-A) knob and adjust the main (VFO-A) receiver RF gain using the small AF GAIN (VFO-B) knob.
This puts both “Volume” controls on the same shaft.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 119
MENU MODE
MODE-CW GROUP
041. F-KEYER TYPE
045. CW AUTO MODE
Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode
for the device connected to the front panel’s KEY jack.
Available Values: OFF/BUG/ELEKEY/ACS
Default Setting: ELEKEY
OFF:
Disables the front panel’s keyer (“straight
key” mode for use with external keyer or
computer-driven keying interface).
BUG:
Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One
paddle produces “dits” automatically, while
the other paddle manually produces “dahs.”
ELEKEY: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) disabled.
ACS:
Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) enabled.
Function: Enables/disables CW keying while operating on SSB.
Available Values: OFF/50MHz/ON
Default Setting: OFF
OFF: Disables CW keying while operating on SSB.
50MHz: Enables CW keying only while operating SSB
on 50 MHz (but not HF).
ON:
Enables CW keying while operating on SSB
(all TX bands).
Note: This feature allows you to move someone from
SSB to CW without having to change modes on the
front panel.
042. F-CW KEYER
Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration of the KEY jack on the front panel.
Available Values: NOR/REV
Default Setting: NOR
NOR: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground
REV: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground
043. R-KEYER TYPE
Function: Select the desired keyer operation mode
for the device connected to the rear panel’s KEY jack.
Available Values: OFF/BUG/ELEKEY/ACS
Default Setting: ELEKEY
OFF:
Disables the front panel’s keyer (“straight
key” mode for use with external keyer or
computer-driven keying interface).
BUG:
Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One
paddle produces “dits” automatically, while
the other paddle manually produces “dahs.”
ELEKEY: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) disabled.
ACS:
Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) enabled.
044. R-CW KEYER
Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration of the KEY jack on the rear panel.
Available Values: NOR/REV
Default Setting: NOR
NOR: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground
REV: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground
Page 120
046. CW BFO
Function: Sets the CW carrier oscillator injection side
for the CW mode.
Available Values: USB/LSB/AUTO
Default Setting: USB
USB: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the USB
side.
LSB: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB
side.
AUTO: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB
side while operating on the 7 MHz band and
below, and the USB side while operating on
the 10 MHz band and up.
047. CW BK-IN
Function: Sets the CW “break-in” mode.
Available Values: SEMI/FULL
Default Setting: SEMI
SEMI: The transceiver will operate in the semi breakin mode. The delay (receiver recovery) time is
set by the front panel’s CW DELAY knob.
FULL: The transceiver will operate in the full break-in
(QSK) mode.
048. CW WAVE SHAPE
Function: Selects the CW carrier wave-form shape
(rise/fall times).
Available Values: 1/2/4/6 msec
Default Setting: 4 msec
049. CW WEIGHT
Function: Sets the Dot:Dash ratio for the built-in electronic keyer.
Available Values: (1:) 2.5 ~ 4.5
Default Setting: 3.0
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
MODE-CW GROUP
MODE-DAT GROUP
050. CW FREQ DISPLAY
053. DATA IN SELECT
Function: Frequency Display Format for the CW
mode.
Available Values: DIRECT FREQ/PITCH OFFSET
Default Setting: PITCH OFFSET
DIRECT FREQ: Displays the receiver carrier frequency, without any offset added.
When changing modes between
SSB and CW, the frequency display
remains constant.
PITCH OFFSET: This frequency display reflects the
added BFO offset.
Function: Selects the data input to be used on the
PKT mode.
Available Values: DATA/PC
Default Setting: DATA
DATA: Uses the data input line which is connected to
the rear panel’s PACKET jack while using the
PKT mode.
PC: Uses the data input line which is connected to
the rear panel’s AUDIO IN jack while using the
PKT mode. The optional Data Management Unit
(DMU-9000) is required for this to be effective.
051. PC KEYING
054. DATA GAIN
Function: Enables/disables CW keying from the “DATA
IN” terminal on the rear panel’s PACKET jack while
operating on the CW mode.
Available Values: DISABLE/ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
052. QSK
Function: Selects the time delay between when the
PTT is keyed and the carrier is transmitted during QSK
operation when using the internal keyer.
Available Values: 15/20/25/30 msec
Default Setting: 15 msec
Function: Sets the data input level from the TNC to
the AFSK modulator.
Available Values: 0 ~ 255
Default Setting: 128
055. DATA OUT
Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to
the data output port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack.
Available Values: VFO-a/VFO-b
Default Setting: VFO-a
056. DATA VOX DELAY
Function: Adjusts the “VOX” delay (receiver recovery) time on the PKT mode.
Available Values: 30 ~ 3000 msec
Default Setting: 300 msec
057. DATA VOX GAIN
Function: Adjusts the “VOX” gain on the PKT mode.
Available Values: 0 ~ 255
Default Setting: 128
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 121
MENU MODE
MODE-FM GROUP
MODE-PKT GROUP
058. FM MIC GAIN
062. PKT DISP (SSB)
Function: Sets the microphone gain for the FM mode.
Available Values: MCVR/0 ~ 255 (FIX)
Default Setting: 128
When this menu is set to “MCVR,” you may adjust
the microphone gain using the front panel’s MIC knob.
Function: Sets the packet frequency display offset.
Available Values: –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
059. FM MIC SELECT
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the
FM mode.
Available Values: FRONT/REAR/DATA/PC
Default Setting: FRONT
FRONT: Selects the microphone connected to the
front panel’s MIC jack while using the FM
mode.
REAR: Selects the microphone connected to the
rear panel’s MIC jack while using the FM
mode.
DATA: Selects the microphone connected to pin 1
of the PACKET Jack while using the FM
mode.
PC:
Selects the microphone connected to the
rear panel’s AUDIO IN 3.5-mm jack while
using the FM mode. The optional Data Management Unit (DMU-9000) is required for this
to be effective.
063. PKT GAIN
Function: Adjusts the audio input level from the TNC
to the AFSK modulator.
Available Values: 0 ~ 255
Default Setting: 128
064. PKT SHIFT (SSB)
Function: Sets the carrier point during the SSB Packet
operation
Available Values: –3000 ~ +3000 Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default Setting: +1000 Hz (Typical center frequency
for PSK31, etc.)
060. RPT SHIFT (28MHz)
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on
the 28 MHz band.
Available Values: 0 ~ 1000 kHz
Default Setting: 100 kHz
061. RPT SHIFT (50MHz)
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on
the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: 0 ~ 4000 kHz
Default Setting: 1000 kHz
Page 122
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
MODE-RTY GROUP
MODE-SSB GROUP
065. POLARITY-R
069. SSB MIC SELECT
Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity for RTTY receive operation.
Available Values: NOR/REV
Default Setting: NOR
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the
SSB mode.
Available Values: FRONT/REAR/DATA/PC
Default Setting: FRONT
FRONT: Selects the microphone connected to the
front panel’s MIC jack while using the SSB
modes.
REAR: Selects the microphone connected to the
rear panel’s MIC jack while using the SSB
modes.
DATA: Selects the microphone connected to pin 1
of the PACKET Jack while using the SSB
modes.
PC:
Selects the microphone connected to the
rear panel’s AUDIO IN 3.5-mm jack while
using the SSB modes. The optional Data
Management Unit (DMU-9000) is required for
this to be effective.
066. POLARITY-T
Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity for RTTY transmit operation.
Available Values: NOR/REV
Default Setting: NOR
067. RTTY SHIFT
Function: Selects the frequency shift for the FSK RTTY
operation.
Available Values:170/200/425/850 Hz
Default Setting: 170 Hz
068. RTTY TONE
Function: Selects the mark tone for RTTY operation.
Available Values: 1275/2125 Hz
Default Setting: 2125 Hz
070. SSB-TX-BPF
Function: Selects the audio passband of the Enhanced
DSP modulator on the SSB mode.
Available Values: 50-3000(Hz)/100-2900(Hz)/
200-2800(Hz)/300-2700(Hz)/400-2600(Hz)/3000WB
Default Setting: 300-2700 Hz
071. LSB RX-CARRIER
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for LSB
mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz steps)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
072. LSB TX-CARRIER
Function: Adjusts the transmitter carrier point for LSB
mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz steps)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
Advice: This menu item is for future expansion of the
transceiver’s capabilities. Changing this setting will
have no effect.
073. USB RX-CARRIER
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for USB
mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz steps)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
074. USB TX-CARRIER
Function: Adjusts the transmitter carrier point for USB
mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ +200 Hz (10 Hz steps)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
Advice: This menu item is for future expansion of the
transceiver’s capabilities. Changing this setting will
have no effect.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 123
MENU MODE
RX AUDIO GROUP
RX DSP GROUP
078. MAIN-CONTOUR-LEVEL
Function: Selects the gain curve of the AGC amplifier.
Available Values: NORMAL/SLOPE
Default Setting: NORMAL
NORMAL: The AGC output level will follow a linear
response to the antenna input level, while
AGC is activated.
SLOPE: The AGC output level will increase at 1/10
the rate of the antenna input level, while
AGC is activated.
Function: Adjusts the parametric equalizer gain of
the main band (VFO-A) receiver Contour filter.
Available Values: –40 ~ +20 dB
Default Setting: –15 dB
Audio Output
075. AGC-SLOPE
SLOPE
NORMAL
Input Signal
076. HEADPHONE MIX
Function: Selects one of three audio mixing modes
when using headphones during Dual Receive operation.
Available Values: SEPARATE/COMBINE-1/COMBINE-2
Default Setting: COMBINE-2
SEPARATE: Audio from the main (VFO-A) receiver
is heard only in the left ear, and sub
(VFO-B) receiver audio solely in the
right ear.
COMBINE-1: Audio from both main (VFO-A) and sub
(VFO-B) receivers can be heard in both
ears, but sub (VFO-B) audio is attenuated in the left ear and main (VFO-A)
audio is attenuated in the right ear.
COMBINE-2: Audio from both main (VFO-A) and sub
(VFO-B) receivers is combined and
heard equally in both ears.
077. SPEAKER OUT
Function: Selects audio mixing modes for the “sub”
(secondary) speaker during Dual Receive operation.
Available Values: SEPARATE/COMBINE
Default Setting: COMBINE
SEPARATE: Audio from the main (VFO-A) receiver is
fed to the main speaker, and sub (VFOB) receiver audio is fed to the “sub”
speaker.
COMBINE: Audio from both main (VFO-A) and sub
(VFO-B) receivers is combined and split
equally between the main and sub
speakers.
079. MAIN-CONTOUR-WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the main band (VFOA) receiver Contour filter.
Available Values: 1 - 11
Default Setting: 10
080.SUB-CONTOUR-LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the parametric equalizer gain of
the sub band (VFO-B) receiver Contour filter.
Available Values: –40 ~ +20 dB
Default Setting: –15 dB
081. SUB-CONTOUR-WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the sub band (VFOB) receiver Contour filter.
Available Values: 1 ~ 11
Default Setting: 10
082. IF-NOTCH-WIDTH
Function: Selects the bandwidth of the DSP NOTCH
filter
Available Values: NARROW/WIDE
Default Setting: WIDE
083. MAIN-CW-SHAPE
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
main band (VFO-A) DSP filter for the CW mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
084. MAIN-CW-SLOPE
Function: Selects the shape factor of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the CW mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
“Q”
“+” Gain
“-- ” Gain
IF
BANDWIDTH
CONTOUR “GAIN” AND “Q”
Page 124
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
RX DSP GROUP
085. MAIN-CW-NARROW
090. MAIN-RTTY-SLOPE
Function: Selects the passband of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the CW “narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Default Setting: 300 Hz
Function: Selects the shape factor of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the RTTY mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
086. MAIN-PSK-SHAPE
091. MAIN-RTTY-NARROW
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
main band (VFO-A) DSP filter for the PSK mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
Function: Selects the passband of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the RTTY “narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Default Setting: 300 Hz
092. MAIN-SSB-SHAPE
Function: Selects the shape factor of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the PSK mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
main band (VFO-A) DSP filter for the SSB mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
088. MAIN-PSK-NARROW
093. MAIN-SSB-SLOPE
Function: Selects the passband of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the PSK “narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Default Setting: 300 Hz
Function: Selects the shape factor of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the SSB mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
089. MAIN-RTTY-SHAPE
094. MAIN-SSB-NARROW
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
main band (VFO-A) DSP filter for the RTTY mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
Function: Selects the passband of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the “narrow” SSB mode.
Available Values: 200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/
1650/1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz
Default Setting: 1800 Hz
087. MAIN-PSK-SLOPE
SHARP
MEDIUM
WIDE
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
sub band (VFO-B) DSP filter for the CW mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
096. SUB-CW-FIL-SLOPE
FILTER PASSBAND
SHARP
095. SUB-CW-SHAPE
SOFT
Function: Selects the shape factor of the sub band
(VFO-B) DSP filter for the CW mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
FILTER SHAPE
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 125
MENU MODE
RX DSP GROUP
097. SUB-CW-NARROW
102. SUB-RTTY-SLOPE
Function: Selects the passband of the sub band (VFOB) DSP filter for the CW “narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Default Setting: 300 Hz
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Selects the shape factor of the sub band
(VFO-B) DSP filter for the RTTY mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
098. SUB-PSK-SHAPE
103. SUB-RTTY-NARROW
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
sub band (VFO-B) DSP filter for the PSK mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Selects the passband of the sub band (VFOB) DSP filter for the RTTY “narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Default Setting: 300 Hz
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
104. SUB-SSB-SHAPE
Function: Selects the shape factor of the sub band
(VFO-B) DSP filter for the PSK mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
sub band (VFO-B) DSP filter for the SSB mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
100. SUB-PSK-NARROW
105. SUB-SSB-SLOPE
Function: Selects the passband of the sub band (VFOB) DSP filter for the PSK “narrow” mode.
Available Values: 25/50/100/200/300/400 Hz
Default Setting: 300 Hz
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Selects the shape factor of the sub band
(VFO-B) DSP filter for the SSB mode.
Available Values: GENTLE/MEDIUM/STEEP
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
101. SUB-RTTY-SHAPE
106. SUB-SSB-NARROW
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the
sub band (VFO-B) DSP filter for the RTTY mode.
Available Values: SOFT/SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance attached to amplitude
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance attached to phase of the
filter factor.
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
Function: Selects the passband of the main band
(VFO-A) DSP filter for the “narrow” SSB mode.
Available Values: 200/400/600/850/1100/1350/1500/
1650/1800/1950/2100/2250 Hz
Default Setting: 1800 Hz
Advice: If the Dual Receiver Unit (RXU-9000) is not
installed, changing this setting will have no effect.
099. SUB-PSK-SLOPE
Page 126
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
SCOPE GROUP
107. MAIN FIX 1.8 MHz
113. MAIN FIX 18 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the main
band (VFO-A) 160 m amateur band, when the optional
Data Management Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display
Unit (TFT-9000) are installed.
Available Values: 1800 - 1999 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 1800 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 18000 - 18199 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 18068 kHz
108. MAIN FIX 3.5 MHz
114. MAIN FIX 21 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 3500 - 3999 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 3500 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 15 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 21000 - 21449 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 21000 kHz
109. MAIN FIX 5.0 MHz
115. MAIN FIX 24 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 5250 - 5499 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 5250 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 12 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 24800 - 24989 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 24890 kHz
110. MAIN FIX 7.0 MHz
116. MAIN FIX 28 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 7000 - 7299 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 7000 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 28000 - 29699 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 28000 kHz
111. MAIN FIX 10 MHz
117. MAIN FIX 50 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 10100 - 10149 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 10100 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 50000 - 53999 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 50000 kHz
112. MAIN FIX 14 MHz
118. SUB FIX 1.8 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 20 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 14000 - 14349 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 14000 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the main
band (VFO-A) 160 m amateur band, when the optional
Data Management Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display
Unit (TFT-9000) are installed.
Available Values: 1800 - 1.999 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 1800 kHz
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 127
MENU MODE
SCOPE GROUP
119. SUB FIX 3.5 MHz
124. SUB FIX 18 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 3500 - 3999 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 3500 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 18000 - 18199 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 18068 kHz
120. SUB FIX 5.0 MHz
125. SUB FIX 21 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 5250 - 5499 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 5250 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 15 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 21000 - 21449 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 21000 kHz
121. SUB FIX 7.0 MHz
126. SUB FIX 24 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 7000 - 7299 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 7000 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 12 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 24800 - 24989 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 24890 kHz
122. SUB FIX 10 MHz
127. SUB FIX 28 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 10100 - 10149 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 10100 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 28000 - 29699 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 28000 kHz
123. SUB FIX 14 MHz
128. SUB FIX 50 MHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 20 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 14000 - 14349 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 14000 kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX
mode Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m
amateur band, when the optional Data Management
Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are
installed.
Available Values: 50.000 - 53999 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 50000 kHz
Page 128
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
TUNING GROUP
TX AUDIO GROUP
129. MAIN DIAL STEP
136. F-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ
Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Knob’s tuning
speed on the SSB, CW, and AM modes.
Available Values: 1 or 10 Hz
Default Setting: 10 Hz
Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower
range for the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to
factory defaults (flat).
100 ~ 700: You may adjust the equalizer gain and Qfactor at this selected audio frequency via
menu items 137: F-PRMTRC EQ1LEVEL and 138: F-PRMTRC EQ1BWTH .
130. MAIN DIAL CW FINE
Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Knob’s tuning
speed in the CW mode.
Available Values: ENABLE/DISABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
ENABLE :Tuning in 1 Hz steps on the CW mode.
DISABLE: Tuning according to the steps determined
via menu item 129: MAIN DIAL STEP.
131. 1MHz/100kHz SELECT
Function: Selects the tuning steps for the CLAR/VFOB knob when the BAND/MHz button is pressed.
Available Values: 1 MHz/100 kHz
Default Setting: 1 MHz
132. AM CH STEP
Function: Selects the tuning steps for the
microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys in the AM mode.
Available Values: 2.5/5/9/10/12.5 kHz
Default Setting: 5 kHz
133. FM CH STEP
Function: Selects the tuning steps for the
microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys in the FM mode.
Available Values: 5/6.25/10/12.5/20 kHz
Default Setting: 5 kHz
134. FM DIAL STEP
Function: Setting of the Main Tuning Knob’s tuning
speed in the FM mode.
Available Values: 10/100 Hz
Default Setting: 100 Hz
135. MY BAND
Function: Programs a band to be skipped while selecting bands using the CLAR/VFO-B knob.
Available Values: 1.8 ~ 50 (MHz)/GEN/TRV
Default Setting: TRV
To program the band to be skipped, rotate the CLAR/
VFO-B knob to recall the band to be skipped while
selecting bands via the CLAR/VFO-B knob, then press
the [ENT] key to change this setting to “ON.” Repeat
the same procedures to cancel the setting (skipped
“off”). The skipped band will be high-lighted on the TFT
display.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
137. F-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range
of the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5
138. F-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
139. F-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle
range for the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set
to factory defaults (flat).
700 ~ 1500: You may adjust the equalizer gain and
Q-factor at this selected audio frequency
via menu items 140: F-PRMTRC EQ2LEVEL and 141: F-PRMTRC EQ2BWTH .
140. F-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle
range of the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5
141. F-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of
the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
Page 129
MENU MODE
TX AUDIO GROUP
142. F-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ
148. R-PRMTRC EQ2-FREQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the high
range for the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/
step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to
factory defaults (flat).
15 ~ 32: You may adjust the equalizer gain and Qfactor in this selected audio frequency via
menu items 143: F-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
and 144: F-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH .
Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle
range for the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/700 ~ 1500 Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set
to factory defaults (flat).
700 ~ 1500: You may adjust the equalizer gain and
Q-factor at this selected audio frequency
via menu items 149: R-PRMTRC EQ2LEVEL and 150: R-PRMTRC EQ2BWTH .
143. F-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
149. R-PRMTRC EQ2-LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range
of the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle
range of the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5
144. F-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of
the front panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
145. R-PRMTRC EQ1-FREQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the low
range for the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/100 ~ 700 Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set to
factory defaults (flat).
100 ~ 700: You may adjust the equalizer gain and Qfactor in this selected audio frequency via
menu items 146: R-PRMTRC EQ1LEVEL and 147: R-PRMTRC EQ1BWTH .
146. R-PRMTRC EQ1-LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range
of the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5
147. R-PRMTRC EQ1-BWTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
Page 130
150. R-PRMTRC EQ2-BWTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of
the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
151. R-PRMTRC EQ3-FREQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the high
range for the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF/1500 ~ 3200 Hz (100 Hz/
step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are set
to factory defaults (flat).
1500 ~ 3200: You may adjust the equalizer gain and
Q-factor at this selected audio frequency
via menu items 152: R-PRMTRC EQ3LEVEL and 153: R-PRMTRC EQ3BWTH .
152. R-PRMTRC EQ3-LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range
of the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –10 ~ +10
Default Setting: +5
153. R-PRMTRC EQ3-BWTH
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of
the rear panel’s parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
MENU MODE
TX GNRL GROUP
154. TX MAX POWER
158. FULL DUPLEX
Function: Selects a maximum output power limit.
Available Values: 200/100/50/10 W
Default Setting: 200 W
Function: Enables/Disables Full Duplex operation.
Available Values: SIMP/DUP
Default Setting: SIMP
Explanation: When the optional Dual Receive Unit
(RXU-9000) is installed, engaging “DUP” allows you
to listen on the Sub (VFO-B) receiver while simultaneously transmitting on the Main (VFO-A) frequency
(on a different band) in a “Full Duplex” mode.
155. TX PWR CONTROL
Function: Configures the RF PWR knob.
Available Values: ALL MODE/CARRIER
Default Setting: ALL MODE
ALL MODE: The RF PWR knob is enabled on all
modes.
CARRIER: The RF PWR knob is enabled in all
modes except SSB. In this configuration,
the SSB output power will be set to maximum, regardless of the RF PWR knob’s
position.
156. EXT AMP TX-GND
Function: Enables/Disables the TX GND jack on the
rear panel.
Available Values: ENABLE/DISABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
157. EXT AMP TUNING PWR
Function: Selects a maximum output power limit for
driving the input circuit of an external linear RF amplifier while tuning (while using the Remote Control function of the linear RF amplifier).
Available Values: 200/100/50/10 W
Default Setting: 100 W
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
159. VOX SELECT
Function: Selects the audio input source for triggering TX during VOX operation.
Available Values: MIC/DATA
Default Setting: MIC
MIC: The VOX function will be activated by microphone audio input.
DATA: The VOX function will be activated by data
audio input.
160. EMERGENCY FREQ TX
Function: Enables Tx/Rx operation on the Alaska
Emergency Channel, 5167.5 kHz.
Available Values: DISABLE/ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
When this Menu Item is set to “ENABLE,” the spot
frequency of 5167.5 kHz will be enabled. The Alaska
Emergency Channel will be found between the Memory
channels “P-1” and “01 (or 1-01).”
Page 131
NOTE
Page 132
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
CUSTOMIZED OPTION
ABOUT CUSTOMIZATION OPTIONS
With regard to the FT DX 9000 Contest, the addition of one or more of the customization options can elevate performance
of the basic transceiver to a higher level. Additionally, you may configure the level of performance that fits the requirements
of your station, as well as your personal tastes and preferences. Because these options are delicate, high-technology devices, please contact WDXC regarding the latest information regarding installation of any options inside your FT DX 9000
Contest.
ˆ Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000)
The Dual Receive Unit (model RXU-9000) not only
permits simultaneous reception on two frequencies (in
the same band or on different bands), but also it enables Full Duplex operation, whereby you may be transmitting on 20 meters while, simultaneously, receiving
on 40 meters or any band other than 14 MHz. The RXU9000 is a fully-equipped replica of the VFO-A, so reception is not compromised when using the VFO-B.
ˆ RF μ-Tuning Units
(MTU-160, MTU-80/40, MTU-30/20)
On the 14 MHz and lower bands, the μ-Tuning Units
provide extraordinarily high Q; the resulting steep shape
factor is a powerful aid for reducing off-frequency interference. Separate modules are available for the 1.8
MHz, 3.5/7 MHz, and 10.1/14 MHz bands, and they
may be installed on the Main Receiver only (not in the
RXU-9000).
Thanks to the large (1.1”/28 mm) inductor through
which a stack of ferrite cores is adjusted, the bandwidth of the μ-Tuning (±12.5 kHz) provides unmatched
protection for the receiver front end and following circuits.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
ˆ Data Management Unit (DMU-9000)/
TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000)
In order to enable the World Clock, Spectrum Scope,
Audio Scope/Oscilloscope, Logbook, Rotator Control,
and Temperature/SWR Status Display functions, you
may install the Data Management Unit (DMU-9000),
which actually is a mini-computer that fits inside your
transceiver. These various functions may then be displayed on a user-supplied external display screen, such
as a plasma or TFT display.
Furthermore, if the TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) is
installed, an external display becomes unnecessary. The
TFT-9000 includes a 6.5”, 800 x 480 dot screen which
provides high resolution and easy viewing, as well as
quick access to the control options available on each
TFT display page.
Page 133
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
When the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, simultaneous reception on two frequencies will be possible. What’s more, full duplex operation (whereby you can be calling CQ on 14 MHz while simultaneously tuning for new
countries on 21 MHz) can be engaged. Independent controls for both receivers are provided, ensuring that there is no
impairment of operating capability when using either receiver in the Dual Receive mode.
Furthermore, the two receivers (VFO-A and VFO-B) have identical architectures, so there is no difference in the interference- or noise-fighting capabilities of the two receivers.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
Advice
These switch’s and knob’s function is basically identical to that explained with respect to the VFO-A, please see the VFOA discussions for detailed explanations of these controls, switches, and indicators.
R.FLT Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
This switch allows selection of the VFO-B Roofing
filter.
AGC
ATT Knobs
(Refer to VFO-A: )
AGC Switch
This switch selects the AGC characteristics for the
VFO-B.
ATT Switch
This switch selects the degree of attenuation, if any,
to be applied to the VFO-B.
VRF Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
This button turns the VFO-B VRF filter on and off.
While activated, the LED inside the button will glow
umber.
Page 134
VRF/NTCH Knobs
)
VRF/μ-T Knob (Refer to VFO-A:
The inner VRF knob tunes the passband of the VFOB RF filter for maximum receiver sensitivity.
Advice
In order to take advantage of the Variable RF
Preselector filter on the VFO-B, the optional VRF Unit
(VRF-9000) must be installed.
)
NTCH Knob (Refer to VFO-A:
The outer NTCH knob adjusts the center frequency
of the VFO-B IF notch filter. The Notch Filter is engaged via the NTCH switch, described in the next
section.
NTCH Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
This switch turns the VFO-B manual IF Notch filter
On and Off. Adjustment of the center frequency of the
Notch filter is provided by the NTCH knob, described in the previous section.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NB
SQL Knobs (Refer to VFO-A:
)
DNR Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
NB Knob
This adjusts the VFO-B IF Noise Blanker level, when
the Noise Blanker is engaged via the NB switch,
described below.
SQL Knob
This knob provides adjustment of the VFO-B noise
Squelch system.
This button turns the VFO-B Digital Noise Reduction
circuit on and off. When the Digital Noise Reduction
is activated, the LED inside the button will glow umber. Adjustment of the Noise Reduction level is provided by the DNR knob, described in the previous
section.
NB Switch (except on FM mode)
(Refer to VFO-A: )
This switch is the On/Off switch for the VFO-B Digital Notch Filter. When turned On, the associated LED
glows Umber.
This switch engages the VFO-B IF Noise Blanker.
Adjustment of the Noise Blanker level is provided by
the NB knob, described in the previous section.
SHIFT
WIDTH Knobs
(except on FM mode)
(Refer to VFO-A: )
SHIFT Knob
This knob adjusts the center frequency of the VFO-B
DSP filter, with an adjustment range of ± 1 kHz.
WIDTH Knob
This knob varies the width of the IF DSP filter for the
VFO-B.
CONT Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
This is the On/Off switch for the VFO-B CONTOUR
filter. When engaged, the CONT LED will glow
Umber. Adjustment of the VFO-B CONTOUR filter’s
frequency is provided by the CONT knob (described
in the next section).
CONT
DNF Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
AF GAIN
RF GAIN
(Refer to VFO-A: )
AF GAIN Knob
This is the VFO-B Volume (AF GAIN) control.
RF GAIN Knob
This is the VFO-B RF GAIN control, which adjusts
the gain of the receiver’s RF and IF amplifier stages.
This control is normally left in the fully clockwise
position.
AFL Switch (Refer to VFO-A:
)
Pressing this button activates the Audio (AF) Limiter
circuit of the VFO-B. This will protect the audio amplifier from distortion, and protect your ears from high
audio levels, caused by sudden peaks in audio input
when the AGC is set to “OFF.” When the Audio Limiter circuit is activated, the LED inside the button will
glow Umber.
DNR
)
CONT (Contour) (Refer to VFO-A:
This knob provides adjustment of the VFO-B CONTOUR filter frequency.
Advice
Use the Menu items “RX DSP 080 SUB-CONTOUR-LEVEL” and “RX DSP 081 SUB-CONTOUR-WIDTH” to configure the VFO-B CONTOUR
filter.
)
DNR Knob (Refer to VFO-A:
This knob is used to select one of the 16 available
noise reduction parameters for the VFO-B Digital
Noise Reduction system.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 135
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
DUAL RECEIVE
When the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, simultaneous reception on the VFO-A and VFO-B is
possible.
1. While receiving on the VFO-A, engage the VFO-B by pressing the SUB
RX key (# ). You will now be receiving on the two frequencies shown
on the main frequency display.
2. Adjusting the volume:
To adjust the VFO-A audio level, rotate the Main AF
GAIN control (# ). To adjust the VFO-B audio
level, rotate the Sub AF GAIN control (# ). In
both cases, clockwise rotation of the knob will increase
the volume level.
VFO-A AF GAIN
ANTENNA Switch
MODE Switch
Sub AF GAIN Knob
BAND Key
SUB RX Key
Main AF GAIN Knob
VFO-B AF GAIN
3. Press the B switch (# ) to enable the capability to change the operating mode for the VFO-B.
4. Having pressed the B switch (# ) in the previous
step, you may also press the BAND keys switch
(# ) to select the operating band on which you want
to set up the VFO-B.
5. Press the appropriate MODE
switch (# ) to select the desired
operating mode for the VFO-B.
6. After you have set up the band and mode for the VFOB, you should now select the proper antenna, using
the ANTENNA SELECT 1 ~ 4 switches, or, for
receive-only capability, the RX (Antenna) switch
(# ).
Page 136
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
DUAL RECEIVE
7. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to adjust the
VFO-A frequency, and rotate the CLAR/VFO-B
tuning dial (# ) to adjust the VFO-B frequency.
PITCH Knob
MAIN RX Key
Main Tuning Dial
SQL Knob
VFO-A MAIN DIAL Knob
VFO-B CLAR/VFO-B Knob
8. To cancel Dual Receive operation, and receive just
on the VFO-A, press the MAIN
RX key (# ); the Green SUB
RX key (# ) LED will go out,
and monoband operation on the
VFO-A will resume.
SUB RX Key
SQL Knob
CLAR/VFO-B Knob
Note
Please remember that, so long as the B Mode switch
(# ) is illuminated, any mode or band changes will still
be applied to the VFO-B, whether or not Dual Receive is
engaged.
Quick Note
By convention in the Amateur bands, LSB is used on the 7
MHz and lower bands (with the exception of 60 meters),
while USB is utilized on the 14 MHz and higher bands.
Advice
When operating in Dual Receive, the manner in which
the audio is fed to the left and right sides of your headphones (Stereo, Monaural, or Mixed) may be configured using Menu item “RX AUDIO 076 HEADPHONE MIX” (see page 124).
When changing modes from SSB to CW, you will observe a frequency shift on the display. This shift represents the BFO offset between the “zero beat” frequency and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can hear
(the pitch is programmed by the PITCH control
(# )), even though the actual tone that you hear is
not changing. If you do not want this frequency shift
to appear when changing modes from (for example)
USB to CW, use the Menu item “MODE-CW 050
CW FREQ DISPLAY,” described on page 121.
When operating on the FM mode on the VFO-B, rotate the Sub SQL (Squelch) control (# ) clockwise just to the point where the background noise is
just silenced. This is the point of maximum sensitivity
to weak signals. Excessive advancement of the SQL
control will degrade the ability of the receiver to detect weak signals. Adjustment of the VFO-A Squelch
is accomplished using the Main SQL control (# ).
VFO-A SQL Knob
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
VFO-B SQL Knob
Page 137
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
DUAL RECEIVE: FULL DUPLEX OPERATION
The FT DX 9000 Contest which is installed the optional
Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) includes a unique capability among HF transceivers: the ability to operate in a
full diplex environment, where by you can transmit on the
VFO-A while simultaneously tuning around, on a different band, on the VFO-B. This affords the contest operator
extra tuning time in search of new contacts and multipliers
while calling CQ on the “run” band. This yields “SO2R”
(Single Operator, Two Radio) operating capability while
using only one transceiver!
To engage Full Duplex crossband operation, set Menu item
“TX GNRL 158 FULL DUP” to “DUP” instead of the
default “SIMP” selection. To return to normal (non-duplex) operation, return Menu to “SIMP.”
When Full duplex operation is engaged, you may receive
on the VFO-B frequency while transmitting, during dual
receive operation, on a different band on the VFO-A. This
allows you to tune for contacts on 15 meters, for example,
while calling CQ on 20 meters during a slow time in a
contest. Press the SUB TX Button/LED (# ) to switch
transmit control to that VFO to call a station, then press
the MAIN TX Button/LED (# ) to return to the “run”
band and continue your “CQ” process.
Note
Full Duplex operation within the same band (e.g. both
VFO-A and VFO-B on 20 meters) is not possible.
Important Guidelines for Full Duplex Operation
Remember that, at your station location, the capability
exists for damaging RF voltage to be conducted from your
transmitting antenna into your receiving antenna during
full duplex operation. The exact amplitude will depend on
the operating frequency, proximity and polarization alignment of the antennas, and the transmitting power level (including your linear amplifier, if used).
Accordingly, you should take some time, in assembling
your station, to ensure that proper isolation exists between
your station antenna systems. One way to do this is to connect the “receive” antenna coaxial cable to the “Transmitter” jack of low-power Wattmeter, and connect the “Antenna” jack of the Wattmeter to a 50-Ohm Dummy load.
Now transmit on the “TX” antenna you will be using, and
observe the deflection (if any) on the low-power Wattmeter connected to the “receive” antenna. For safe operation
of the FT DX 9000, you should observe “10 mW” or less
on the Wattmeter.
This capability within a single transceiver is a unique feature of the FT DX 9000. It relieves you of the need to run
separate key, PTT, and other control lines to two different
radios from your logging computer.
Page 138
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
DUAL RECEIVE: FULL DUPLEX OPERATION
Using Headphones for Dual Receive
To take advantage of dual reception, you will want to connect stereo headphones to the PHONES jack. Like the AF
GAIN control, headphone audio mixing can also be configured as desired from Menu Selection: “RX AUDIO 076
HEADPHONE MIX.” Three audio mixing schemes are
selectable as follows:
OFF: Audio from the VFO-A is heard only in the left
ear, and VFO-B audio solely in the right ear.
MID: Audio from both VFO-A and VFO-B can be heard in
both ears, but VFO-B audio is attenuated in the left
ear and VFO-A audio is attenuated in the right ear.
FULL: Audio from both VFO-A and VFO-B combined
and heard equally in both ears “Monaural” mode).
Sideband Diversity Reception
Here you receive a single AM signal through the two receivers, each receiving the opposite sideband. Skywavepropagated signals often show phase distortion in this
mode, but it gives you a view of the entire passband, from
which you can then select the best sideband for listening
(or for SWL Dx’ing, you may want to listen to both sidebands at the same time, to get the best copy). On
groundwave signals, where the phase of the sidebands is
likely to be the same, there is an interesting sense of depth
to the signal.
To tune in a signal using this mode, you should have stereo headphones connected to the front panel PHONES jack
or an external stereo speaker connected to the rear panel
EXT SP jacks.
Set the VFO-A to either LSB or USB mode, and tune
for zero beat on the desired signal.
Press the AXB button (# ) to copy this mode and
frequency into the VFO-B, then press the mode button to select the opposite sideband for the VFO-A.
If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme
to the “COMBINE-1” mode via the Menu Selection:
“RX AUDIO 076 HEADPHONE MIX,” and activate dual reception.
Adjust the AF GAIN knob(s) to balance the volume of the two receivers.
If interference is present on one of the channels, you may
have to turn its AF GAIN control to suppress that channel (or press the green RX LED/button to disable the
receiver with the sideband experiencing interference). Otherwise, try changing the headphone audio mixing scheme
to “FULL” or “OFF” in the Menu Selection: “RX AUDIO
076 HEADPHONE MIX” for different effects (or try settings with similar effects on your external amplifier). Although you don’t get the “stereophonic” effect in the monaural mode, the two signals are still mixed, offering the
potential for much better copy than in regular AM or even
single-sideband ECSS modes.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Bandwidth Diversity Reception
This mode involves receiving the same signal through two
different bandpass filters. The frequency and mode of both
the VFO-A and VFO-B are the same. The VFO-A can be
set up for a narrow bandpass, and the VFO-B for a wide
bandpass, using the WIDTH knobs, resulting in a spatial perception of the channel. Although any mode (except
FM) can be used, CW offers the widest array of choices,
and perhaps the most startling effects on crowded channels.
Stereo headphones or an external stereo speaker are recommended for this mode. To set up the transceiver for
bandwidth diversity reception:
Select the desired mode on the Main band (VFO-A).
Tune to the signal of interest.
Press the AXM button (# ) to copy this mode
and frequency into the VFO-B.
If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme
to the “MID” mode via the Menu Selection “RX AUDIO 076 HEADPHONE MIX” and activate dual reception.
Adjust the AF GAIN knob(s) to balance the volume of the two receivers.
Now try manipulating the SHIFT and WIDTH
controls (on both VFO-A and VFO-B) to observe the
interesting effects of bandwidth diversity.
Polarity Diversity
Similar in concept to the bandwidth diversity capability just described, another interesting capability
of the FT DX 9000 is the ability to use two different
antennas on the same frequency, using dual reception. For example, you might have a horizontal Yagi
on the main band, and a vertical antenna on the sub
band, then lock the two frequencies together and
engage dual reception.
Frequently, the fading observed on the HF bands is
not so much a change in ionization level, but rather a
shift in the polarization of the signal as it travels to
and from the ionosphere. Having an opposite-polarization antenna available can fill in the signal during
deep fades, and you may then transmit on whichever
antenna is providing the strongest signal at the moment (see the discussion on Split Frequency operation, see page 82).
Page 139
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
DIAL SWAP CONFIGURATION (AF/RF GAIN CONTROLS)
Using the Menu, it is possible to change the RF GAIN control (for the VFO-A) to serve as the VFO-B AF GAIN
control. In this case, the Menu Item “GENERAL 038 AF/RF DIAL SWAP” will move the VFO-A RF GAIN control
function to the knob normally utilized for the VFO-B receiver’s AF GAIN control. In this way, both the VFO-A and
VFO-B AF GAIN controls will be on the same shaft, as will the two VFOs’ RF GAIN controls, and this may be
particularly useful during Dual Receive operation.
VFO-A
RF GAIN knob
VFO-B
RF GAIN knob
Dial Swap Setup
1. Press the MNU key (# ) to engage the Menu
mode; the Menu list will appear on the LCD Display.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial (# ) to select Menu
item “GENERAL 038 AF/RF DIAL SWAP.”
3. Rotate the CLAR/VFO-B knob (# ) so as to select “SWAP” instead of the factory-default “NORMAL” selection.
4. Press and hold in the MNU key (# ) for two seconds to save the new configuration and exit to normal
operation.
VFO-A
AF GAIN knob
VFO-B
AF GAIN knob
Main Tuning Dial
MNU key
CLAR/VFO-B Knob
Quick Point
If the Dial Swap function has been engaged, the VFO-A
AF GAIN
RF GAIN control (# ) will be
reconfigured so that it now operates as AF GAIN (VFOA)
AF GAIN (VFO-B); the VFO-B AF GAIN
RF
GAIN control (# ) will now be configured as RF GAIN
(VFO-A)
RF GAIN (VFO-B).
Page 140
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
CHANGING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
An internal switch, and the menu, allow you to configure the way audio is fed to the two internal speakers (either “stereo”
or “monaural” modes are available).
MENU SELECTION 77
SPEAKER MIX
Advice
At the default setting, the audio signals from both the VFO-A and VFO-B are combined, and the resulting monaural audio
takes advantage of the combined aperture of the two speakers. For most operation, this configuration results in beautiful
audio reproduction, and is to be preferred. If you wish to leave the speaker setup as is, you may skip the remainder of this
section.
SPEAKER SELECT SWITCH
COM
SEP
COMBINE VFO-A and VFO-B audio will be mixed in the two inter- VFO-A and VFO-B audio will be mixed but heard only
nal speakers.
from the “A” internal speaker.
VFO-A audio will be heard from internal speaker “A.” VFO-A audio will be heard from internal speaker “A,”
SEPARATE
For listening to audio from the VFO-B receiver, con- and VFO-B audio will be heard from internal speaker
nect an external speaker to rear-panel terminal “B.”
“B.”
With respect to the switch on the Speaker Unit, the left position is SEP and the right position is COM .
Speaker Selection Switch Configuration
1. Set the front panel’s Main Power switch to the Off
position to turn the radio off.
2. Turn the rear panel Power switch off (“O”), and unplug the AC cable from the rear-panel [~AC IN] jack.
3. Remove the eight screws from the left and right faces
of the outer case, then remove the three remaining
screws that are affixing the top case, and remove the
top case from the transceiver.
4. Refer to the illustration, and change the position of
the speaker selection switch (the default setting is
“COM” which combines the audio; “SEP” separates
the Main and Sub receiver audio into the Left and Right
speakers).
5. Replace the three screws on the top case, then replace
the eight screws previously removed from the left and
right sides of the transceiver.
6. Speaker re-configuration is now complete. You may
now plug in the AC cable, and turn the rear panel and
front panel Power switches back on (in that order), to
resume operation.
EXT SPKR “A” Jack
BUFFER AMP
AF AMP
MAIN BAND
(VFO-A)
MAIN BAND
(VFO-A)
Internal Speaker “A”
BUFFER AMP
SUB BAND
(VFO-B)
TWIN
COM
Speaker
Select Switch
AF AMP
Internal Speaker “B”
SEP
EXT SPKR “B” Jack
SEP
Menu Selection 16
Speaker OUT(AFPA )
SUB BAND
(VFO-B)
Speaker Select Switch
(Inside the Transceiver)
Quick Point
High-Quality Internal Speaker Details!
Two large-aperture, high quality speakers are incorporated into the FT DX 9000 Contest, for outstanding reproduction of the
incoming audio signals. Sporting a combined aperture of 7” (184 mm), the twin 3-5/8” (92 mm) speakers are designed to
enhance your operating experience with their rich tonal quality and ultra-low distortion characteristics.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 141
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
ADJACENT CHANNEL MONITOR (ACM) -- CW MODE ONLY -When the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, the Adjacent Channel Monitor will be available for use
(because it utilizes the second receiver to provide the ACM function). ACM utilizes the VFO-B to monitor a 2.4 kHz
window outside your current CW passband (for example, 500 Hz) for the VFO-A. The peak signal strengths within this 2.4
kHz window are displayed on the VFO-B S-meter, alerting you to encroachment from other stations.
To activate the Adjacent Channel Monitor, press the
ACM switch (# ). The LED imbedded in the switch
will glow Red.
Advice
If you do not have Dual Receive engaged, turning on
the ACM feature will cause the RX LED associated with the VFO-B to become illuminated.
When ACM is turned on, the frequency of the VFO-B
will automatically be set to match that of the VFO-A.
When operating on Dual Receive, engaging the ACM
feature automatically sets the VFO-B to the same frequency as the VFO-A, and by inverting the DSP filter
the VFO-B is used for monitoring (visually) for activity outside your current receiver passband on the VFOA.
ACM Switch
When ACM is turned on during Dual Receive operation, the audio from the VFO-B will disappear.
A typical operating circumstance where ACM can help is when you are running stations during a contest in a 250 Hz
bandwidth. If stations suddenly stop calling you, it may be because another strong station has started calling CQ near
your frequency. By engaging ACM, your VFO-B S-meter will display the strongest station on the area ± 1.2 kHz
from your current operating frequency; if the encroaching station is sufficiently close, you might want to ask him or
her kindly to QSY.
Advice
By rotating the VFO-B AF GAIN control (# ) fully counter-clockwise, then setting the VFO-A AF GAIN
control (# ) to a comfortable listening level, you will be able to hear the desired signal within the 300 Hz passband
selected.
In addition, if you rotate the VFO-A AF GAIN control fully counter-clockwise, then advance the VFO-B AF
GAIN control, you will be able to hear audio from the passband 1.05 kHz on either side of the VFO-A’s 300 Hz
passband, but you will not hear the audio from within that 300 Hz passband. In other words, you can monitor
everything outside the selected 300 Hz bandwidth, but within a 2.4 kHz window, by advancing the VFO-B AF
GAIN control.
1.05kHz
Page 142
300Hz
1.05kHz
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
RF GAIN -- SSB/CW/AM MODES -When the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, the RF Gain levels of the VFO-A and VFO-B may be
adjusted independently.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 53 for details.
VFO-A RF Gain Adjustment
The VFO-A RF GAIN control (# ) should, initially,
be rotated to the fully clockwise position. This is the point
of maximum sensitivity, and counter-clockwise rotation
will gradually reduce the system gain.
As the RF GAIN control (# ) is rotated counterclockwise to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will
rise. This indicates that the AGC voltage being applied
to the receiver (to reduce the gain) is increasing.
Rotating the RF GAIN control (# ) to the fully
counter-clockwise position will essentially disable the
receiver, as the gain will be greatly reduced. In this
case, as well, the S-meter will appear to be “pegged”
against the right edge of the analog S-meter scale.
VFO-B RF Gain Adjustment
The VFO-B RF GAIN control (# ) operates identically to the VFO-A RF Gain control. The effects of counterclockwise rotation of the VFO-B RF Gain control may be
observed visually on the VFO-B S-meter.
As the RF GAIN control (# ) is rotated counterclockwise to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will
rise. this indicates that the AGC voltage being applied
to the receiver (to reduce the gain) is increasing.
Rotating the RF GAIN control (# ) to the fully
counter-clockwise position will essentially disable the
receiver, as the gain will be greatly reduced. In this
case, as well, the S-meter will appear to be “pegged”
against the right edge of the analog S-meter scale.
VFO-B
RF GAIN Knob VFO-A
RF GAIN Knob
VFO-A
VFO-B
Advice
Reception frequently can be optimized by rotating the RF
GAIN control slightly counter-clockwise to the point
where the incoming noise level is just about the same as
the “stationary” meter needle position as set by the adjustment of the RF Gain control. This setting ensures that excessive gain is not being utilized, without so much gain
reduction that incoming signals cannot be heard.
Quick Point
The RF Gain control, along with the IPO and Attenuator
features, all affect the system receiver gain in different
ways. As a first step in dealing with high noise or a crowded,
high-level signal environment, the IPO generally should
be the first feature engaged, if the frequency is low enough
to allow the preamplifier to be bypassed. Thereafter, the
RF Gain and Attenuator features may be employed to provide precise, delicate adjustment of the receiver gain so as
to optimize performance fully.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 143
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
USING THE VRF (VARIABLE RF FRONT-END FILTER)
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) and the Sub Receiver’s Variable RF Front-end Filter Unit (VRF-9000) are
installed, you will have VRF capability either on the VFO-A and VFO-B. Operation is identical on both VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 54 for details.
Using VRF on VFO-A Frequency
1. Press the VRF/μ switch (# ) momentarily. The
LED inside the switch will become illuminated, and
the VRF system will be engaged, centered on your
current Amateur band.
2. You may rotate the VRF/μ knob (# ) to skew the
position of the VRF system relative to your operating
frequency.
After moving the passband of the VRF system manually, you
may re-center it on the current Amateur band by pressing and
holding in the VRF/μ switch (# ) for two seconds.
VRF Knob
VRF Switch
VRF/μ Knob
VRF/μ Switch
3. To switch VRF off, press the VRF/μ switch (# )
momentarily again. The LED imbedded in the switch
will go out, and the VRF circuit will be removed from
the incoming received signal path.
Using VRF on the VFO-B Frequency
Advice
In order to take advantage of the Variable RF Preselector
filter on the VFO-B, the optional VRF Unit (VRF-9000)
must be installed.
VFO-B
VFO-A
1. Press the SUB RX switch (# ) to engage Dual
Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B VRF switch (# ) to engage the
VRF. The LED imbedded in the switch will light up,
confirming that VRF is now in the signal path for the
VFO-B.
The settings of the VRF are set and held in memory independently for each Amateur band, so any custom settings will be
maintained despite any band changes you perform.
3. Rotation of the VFO-B VRF knob (# ) allows
adjustment of the center frequency of the VRF circuit.
If you have made adjustments to the VRF circuit's center frequency, press and hold in the VRF switch (# ) for two
seconds to re-center the VRF on the center of the Amateur
band on which you currently are operating.
4. To switch VRF off, press the VFO-B VRF switch
(# ) momentarily again. The LED imbedded in the
switch will go out, and the VRF circuit will be removed from the VFO-B incoming signal path.
Page 144
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
ROOFING/R.FLT (ROOFING FILTERS)
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, three Roofing Filters are available for selection in each VFO
(VFO-A and VFO-B). Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 55 for details.
VFO-A Roofing Filter Operation
Press the VFO-A ROOFING switch (# ) to toggle the
Roofing Filter selection.
AUTO 15kHz 6kHz 3kHz AUTO
As you repeatedly press this switch, you will observe different LEDs
lighting up in the Roofing Filter area of the front panel, denoting
the Roofing Filter currently in use. Also, the selected Roofing Filter
bandwidth will be indicated on the LCD.
Typically, this selection will be set to “AUTO.”
The Roofing Filter selection will be memorized independently on
each VFO in the VFO stack.
VFO-B Roofing Filter Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B R.FLT switch (# ) to toggle the
Roofing Filter selection.
AUTO
15kHz 6kHz 3kHz AUTO
As you repeatedly press the R.FLT switch (# ), the selected bandwidth will appear on the LCD.
Typically, this selection will be set to “AUTO.”
When “AUTO” is selected, the LED imbedded in the switch
will go out (there always is a roofing filter in the receiver path).
The Roofing Filter selection will be memorized independently
on each VFO in the VFO stack.
Roofing Filter bandwidth will be indicated on the LCD
R.FLT Switch
ROOFING Switch
Roofing Filter bandwidth will
be indicated on the TFT
VFO-B
VFO-A
Quick Point
The “AUTO” selection of the Roofing Filter is based
on the operating mode. However, you may override
the automatic selection, if band conditions warrant a
different (usually, a tighter) selection.
The AUTO mode Roofing Filter selections are shown
below:
AM/FM/FM-PKT
LSB/USB/PKT
CW/RTTY
15kHz
6kHz
3kHz
When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and
the Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter
bandwidth will automatically be set to 15 kHz, as this
setting provides the most effective noise blanking.
However, you still may override the automatic setting, and select a more narrow Roofing Filter. Noise
blanking may be compromised, however, with a tighter
Roofing Filter in the line.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 145
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
CONTOUR/CONT (CONTOUR) CONTROL OPERATION
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, “Contour” tuning is available on both the VFO-A and VFO-B
receivers. Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 56 for details.
Using Contour on the VFO-A Receiver
1. Press the VFO-A CONT switch (# ). The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Red to confirm that
the Contour filter is engaged.
2. Rotate the VFO-A CONTOUR knob (# ) to
achieve the most natural-sounding audio reproduction
on the incoming signal.
To cancel Contour tuning, press the VFO-A CONT
switch (# ) once more.
Using Contour on the VFO-B Receiver
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B CONT switch (# ). The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Orange, confirming
that the Contour filter is engaged.
3. Rotate the VFO-B CONT knob (# ) to achieve
the most natural-sounding audio reproduction on the
incoming signal.
CONT Knob
CONT Switch
VFO-B
CONTOUR Knob
CONT Switch
VFO-A
To cancel Contour tuning, press the VFO-B CONT
switch (# ) once more.
Page 146
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
IF SHIFT OPERATION -- SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES -If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, IF Shift operation is available on both the VFO-A and VFO-B.
Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 57 for details.
VFO-A Band IF Shift Operation
Rotate the VFO-A SHIFT (# ) control to the left or
right to reduce the interference.
VFO-B Band IF Shift Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Rotate the VFO-B SHIFT (# ) control to the left
or right to reduce the interference.
IF Shift system may be observed on the LCD
SHIFT Knob
SHIFT Knob
Advice
The position of the IF Shift system may be observed on
the LCD display.
VFO-B
VFO-A
IF Shift system may be
observed on the LCD
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 147
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
WIDTH (IF DSP BANDWIDTH) TUNING -- SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES -If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, IF Width operation is available on both the VFO-A and VFOB. Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 58 for details.
VFO-A Band IF Width Operation
Rotate the VFO-A WIDTH knob (# ) to adjust the
bandwidth. Counter-clockwise rotation reduces the bandwidth, while clockwise rotation increases the bandwidth.
Sub (VFO-B) Band IF Width Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Rotate the VFO-B WIDTH knob (# ) to adjust
the bandwidth. Counter-clockwise rotation reduces the
bandwidth, while clockwise rotation increases the
bandwidth.
WIDTH system may be observed on the LCD
WIDTH Knob
WIDTH Knob
Advice
You may observe the effects of adjustment of the
WIDTH control on the LCD display.
VFO-B
VFO-A
WIDTH system may be
observed on the LCD
Page 148
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
IF NOTCH FILTER OPERATION -- SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES -If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, IF Notch operation is available on both the VFO-A and VFOB. Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 59 for details.
VFO-A Band IF Notch Operation
1. Press the VFO-A NOTCH switch (# ). The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Red to confirm that
the IF Notch filter has been engaged.
2. Rotate the VFO-A NOTCH knob (# ) to null out
the interfering carrier.
To switch the IF Notch filter off, press the VFO-A
NOTCH switch (# ) once more. The LED imbedded
in the switch will turn off, confirming that the IF Notch
filter is no longer operating.
Sub (VFO-B) Band IF Notch Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B NTCH switch (# ). The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Umber to confirm
that the IF Notch filter has been engaged.
3. Rotate the VFO-B NTCH knob (# ) to null out
the interfering carrier.
NTCH Knob
NTCH Switch
VFO-B
NOTCH Knob
NOTCH Switch
VFO-A
To switch the IF Notch filter off, press the VFO-B NTCH
switch (# ) once more. The LED imbedded in the switch
will turn off, confirming that the IF Notch filter is no longer
operating.
Note
When the NTCH switch is pressed and held in for two
seconds, the center of the notch action will be reset to the
positions described below (mode-sensitive):
SSB/AM: The Notch will center at 1.5 kHz (center of
the receiver passband).
CW:
The Notch will center on the frequency
programmed by the PITCH knob (# ).
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 149
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
NR/DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION) OPERATION
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, Digital Noise Reduction operation is available on both the
VFO-A and VFO-B. Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 60 for details.
VFO-A Band DNR Operation
1. Press the VFO-A NR switch (# ). The LED imbedded in the switch will glow Red, confirming that
the DNR system is engaged.
2. Rotate the VFO-A NR knob (# ) to select the setting that most effectively reduces the noise level.
DNR Knob
To disable the DNR system, press the VFO-A NR switch
(# ) once more. The imbedded LED will turn off, confirming that the DNR system is not active.
VFO-B Band DNR Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B DNR switch (# ). The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Umber, confirming
that the DNR system is engaged.
3. Rotate the VFO-B DNR knob (# ) to select the
setting that most effectively reduces the noise level.
DNR Switch
VFO-B
NR Knob
NR Switch
VFO-A
To disable the DNR system, press the VFO-B DNR
switch (# ) once more. The imbedded LED will turn off,
confirming that the DNR system is not active.
Page 150
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
D.NOTCH/DNF (DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER) OPERATION
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, Digital Automatic Notch Filter operation is available on both
the VFO-A and VFO-B. Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 62 for details.
VFO-A Band DNF Operation
Press the VFO-A D.NOTCH switch (# ) to engage the
Digital Notch filter. The LED imbedded in the switch will
glow Red, to confirm that the DNF circuit is engaged.
D.NOTCH Switch
To cancel DNF operation, press the VFO-A D.NOTCH
switch (# ) once more. The imbedded LED will go out,
confirming that the Digital Notch Filter is no longer in
operation.
DNR Switch
Sub (VFO-B) Band DNF Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B DNF switch (# ) to engage the
Digital Notch filter. The LED imbedded in the switch
will glow Umber, to confirm that the DNF circuit is
engaged.
To cancel DNF operation, press the VFO-B DNF switch
(# ) once more. The imbedded LED will go out, confirming that the Digital Notch Filter is no longer in operation.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
VFO-A
VFO-B
Page 151
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
IF NOISE BLANKE (NB) OPERATION
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, IF Noise Blanker operation is available on both the VFO-A and
VFO-B. Operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 62 for details.
VFO-A Band NB Operation
1. Press the VFO-A NB switch (# ) momentarily to
reduce a short pulse noise such as from switching transients, automobile ignitions and power lines. The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Red to confirm that
the Narrow-NB is operating.
Press and hold the VFO-A NB switch (# ) for
two seconds to reduce a longer duration man-made
pulse noise. The LED imbedded in the switch will glow
Yellow to confirm that the Wide-NB is operating.
2. Advance the VFO-A NB control (# ) to the point
where the offending ignition noise is best reduced or
eliminated.
NB Knob
NB Switch
NB Switch
NB Knob
To end Noise Blanker operation, press the VFO-A NB
switch (# ) once more. The LED imbedded in the switch
will turn off, confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer
in operation.
VFO-B Band NB Operation
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B NB switch (# ) momentarily to
reduce a short pulse noise such as from switching transients, automobile ignitions and power lines. The LED
imbedded in the switch will glow Umber to confirm
that the Narrow-NB is operating.
Press and hold the VFO-B NB switch (# ) for
two seconds to reduce a longer duration man-made
pulse noise. The LED imbedded in the switch will glow
Yellow to confirm that the Wide-NB is operating.
3. Advance the VFO-B NB control (# ) to the point
where the offending ignition noise is best reduced or
eliminated.
VFO-A
VFO-B
To end Noise Blanker operation, press the VFO-B NB
(# ) switch once more. The LED imbedded in the switch
will turn off, confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer
in operation.
Advice
When the Roofing filter mode is set to “AUTO” and the
Noise Blanker is turned On, the Roofing Filter bandwidth
will automatically be set to 15 kHz. However, you still
may override the automatic setting, and select a more narrow Roofing Filter.
Page 152
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
If the optional dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, AGC operation is identical on either VFO.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 63 for details.
VFO-A Band AGC Selection
Rotate the VFO-A AGC switch (# ) to select the desired receiver-recovery time constant. For most operation,
we recommend the “AUTO” mode.
VFO-B Band AGC Selection
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED grows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Rotate the VFO-B AGC switch (# ) to select the
desired receiver-recovery time constant.
AGC Switch
AGC Switch
VFO-B
VFO-A
MUTE FEATURE -- VFO-A -If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, during Dual Receive operation it is possible to mute the VFOA audio temporarily, without touching the setting of the AF GAIN control (# ) for the VFO-A.
This capability is particularly useful if you wish to concentrate on the signal being received on the VFO-B during Dual
Receive operation.
Press the VFO-A band’s RX LED/switch (#
).
RX Switch
The VFO-A audio will be silenced, and the green LED in
the RX switch (# ) will blink. To restore reception on
the VFO-A, just press the blinking RX switch/LED
(# ) once more.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 153
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
AUDIO LIMITER (AFL) FEATURE
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, the Audio Limiter (AFL feature is available on both the VFOA and VFO-B.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 65 for details.
VFO-A Band AFL Setup
Press the VFO-A AFL switch (# ) to turn on the Audio Limiter. The imbedded LED in the button will glow
red.
To disable the Audio limiter, press the AFL switch once
more; the imbedded LED will turn off.
AFL Switch
VFO-B Band AFL Setup
1. Pressing the SUB RX switch (# ) will engage
Dual Receive operation.
When the imbedded LED glows green, this is your
confirmation that Dual Receive is in operation.
2. Press the VFO-B AFL switch (# ) to turn on the
Audio Limiter. The imbedded LED in the button will
glow Umber.
VFO-B
AFL Switch
VFO-A
To disable the Audio limiter, press the AFL switch once
more; the imbedded LED will turn off.
ATT
If the optional Dual Receive Unit (RXU-9000) is installed, the RF Attenuator (ATT) feature is available on both the VFOA and VFO-B.
As a reminder, there is no difference in the fundamental performance of the two VFOs. Please see page 52 for details.
VFO-A Attenuator Setup
Rotate the VFO-A ATT switch (#
attenuation level.
) to set the desired
ATT Switch
To restore full signal strength through the Attenuator circuit area, set the ATT switch to the “0” position.
VFO-B Attenuator Setup
Rotate the VFO-B ATT switch (#
attenuation level.
) to set the desired
ATT Switch
To restore full signal strength through the Attenuator circuit area, set the ATT switch to the “0” position.
VFO-B
Page 154
VFO-A
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
DUAL RECEIVE UNIT (RXU-9000)
NOTE
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 155
RF μ-TUNING UNITS (MTU-160, MTU-80/40, MTU-30/20)
The optional RF μ-Tuning Units provide ultra-sharp RF selectivity for the VFO-A. The high Q is made possible by the
narrow-band design; one μ-Tune module is required for the 1.8 MHz band (MTU-160), while the 3.5 and 7 MHz bands are
covered by the MTU-80/40, and the 10.1 and 14 MHz bands are covered by the MTU-30/20.
When one of three optional units is installed, it will automatically be adjusted so as to center on your operating frequency.
The narrow bandwidth is especially useful on the low bands, where many strong signals being received via NVIS propagation (Near Vertical-Incidence Signals) within a narrow bandwidth, and the added protection at the RF stage is especially
helpful in preventing IMD and blocking.
The μ-Tuning circuitry, with a Q and shape factor much higher than that afforded even by VRF, can also be manually
adjusted to provide relief against interference as close as 10 kHz away. The insertion loss of the μ-Tune filters is higher than
that of the VRF circuit, so if Noise Figure is a concern you may select the VRF circuit, instead of μ-Tuning, via the Menu.
Note
The μ-Tuning modules are available only for the VFO-A, and only function up through the 14 MHz band. On the 18 MHz
and higher Amateur bands, the VRF circuitry is utilized.
μ-Tune Operation on the VFO-A Receiver
1. Press the VRF/μ switch (# ). The imbedded Red
LED will light up.
The μ-Tune circuit will automatically align itself
onto your operating frequency.
Remember that μ-Tune only operates on the VFOA band on the 14 MHz and lower bands.
2. Now rotate the VRF/μ knob (# ) to peak the response (background noise) or reduce interference.
The amount of change in the center frequency of
the μ-Tune filter, when rotating the VRF/μ knob
by one click, can be configured using Menu item
“GENERAL 035 μTUNE DIAL STEP.”
3. Press the VRF/μ switch (momentarily) once more
to disengage the μ-Tune filter; the imbedded Red LED
will switch off. In this mode, only the fixed bandpass
filter for the current band will be engaged.
VRF/μ Knob
VRF/μ Switch
Advice
The μ-Tune filters are the most advanced, selective RF preselector filters ever incorporated into an Amateur Radio
transceiver. The RF selectivity provided by μ-Tune can be of tremendous value in ensuring quiet, intermod-free reception even in the most crowded bands on a contest weekend. The μ-Tune filters provide RF selectivity on the order of a
few dozen kHz at -6 dB, at the expense of a few dB of system gain on bands where noise figure is seldom an issue. You
will notice that the S-meter deflection, when μ-Tune is engaged, is slightly less than when it is out of the circuit; this is
normal. If your antenna system gain is so low as to make it impossible to hear band noise when μ-Tune is engaged
(highly unlikely), just switch it out or revert to the VRF system, which has slightly less insertion loss.
As you tune around on an amateur band with μ-Tune engaged, the microprocessor automatically commands the stepper
motor driving the toroid core stack to center the filter on your current operating frequency (the tuning resolution is 5
kHz). You may, however, use the VRF/μ knob (# ) to skew the filter response to one side or the other from your
operating frequency, to deal with heavy interference on one side. To re-center the μ-Tune filter on your operating
frequency, and eliminate any offset, press and hold in the VRF/μ switch (# ) for two seconds.
While μ-Tune is a superior RF preselection circuit, it may be disabled via the Menu; if this is done, the VRF circuit will
engage when the VRF/μ switch is pressed. To disable μ-Tune, go to Menu item “GENERAL 035 μTUNE DIAL
STEP” and set the selection to “OFF.”
Quick Note
The permeability-tuning concept utilized in the μ-Tune circuit dates back many decades, as it was incorporated in such classic
transceivers as the FT-101 and FT-901 series, in addition to the FT DX 400 and similar models. The μ-Tune circuit in the FT DX
9000 is the highest development of this circuit concept ever employed in an Amateur transceiver.
Page 156
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
RF μ-TUNING UNITS (MTU-160, MTU-80/40, MTU-30/20)
μ-Tune and VRF: Comparisons to Fixed Bandpass Filters
VRF
In this example, illustration [a] depicts a typical fixed
bandpass filter covering 14.5 to 22 MHz, and once
again the gray shaded area depicts the fixed bandpass
filter's frequency coverage. The vertical lines in the
illustration, once again, represent hypothetical signals
throughout this frequency range.
Figure [b] shows the same fixed BPF, with the white
area representing the typical passband of the VRF filter operating in the same frequency range. Although
the selectivity of the VRF is not as tight as that of the
μ-Tune filter, the RF selectivity of the VRF preselector
is still magnitudes better than that of the usual fixed
bandpass filter, affording significant protection against
the ingress of high signal voltage from strong out-ofband signals.
Advice
With μ-Tuning, the center frequency of the filter is continuously
adjustable throughout its operating range, and the quality L/C components ensure a tight passband due to the high Q of the circuit.
The RF preselection design task involves not only the selection
of quality L/C components, but the crafting of a tuning mechanism and tuning concept that preserves system Q (thus assuring a
tight bandwidth) while providing a wide operating frequency range
and consistent, automated tuning. The smooth tuning is achieved
by varying the inductance over a wide range; this is accomplished
by motor-driving a large 1.1” (28 mm) ferrite core stack through
a 2” high (50 mm) coil structure. Three μ-Tune modules provide
coverage of the 160, 80/40, and 30/20 meter bands on the FT DX
9000, and the Q of this circuit, being over 300, yields unmatched
RF selectivity for outstanding rejection of undesired signals.
A
1.8MHz
2.5MHz
FRONT-END BAND WIDTH
B
1.8MHz μTUNE BAND WIDTH
2.5MHz
14.5MHz
22MHz
a
FRONT-END BAND WIDTH
b
14.5MHz
VRF BAND WIDTH
22MHz
BPF
50-60 MHz
22-30 MHz
14.5-22 MHz
13.5-14.5 MHz
10-11 MHz
ANTENNA
1
2
3
4
ANTENNA SELECTOR
μ-Tune
Inspection of the illustrations to the right will demonstrate the profound advantage of the μ-Tune circuit. In
illustration [A], the gray area represents the passband
of a typical fixed bandpass filter covering the 1.8 ~ 3
MHz range; this is typical of the kind of bandpass filter found in many high-quality HF receivers today. Note
also the hypothetical distribution of signals across the
160-meter band.
In illustration [B], note the narrow white segment within
the gray passband of the fixed BPF. These narrow segments represents the typical bandwidth of the μ-Tune
filter, and one can see that the passband has been reduced from about 750 kHz in the case of the fixed BPF)
to a few dozen kHz when μ-Tune is engaged. The vast
majority of the incoming signals are outside the passband of the high-Q μ-Tune filter, and they will not impinge on any of the RF/IF amplifiers, the mixers, or
the DSP. Very strong out-of-band signals like this can
cause Intermodulation, blocking, and an elevated noise
floor for a receiver.
6.5-7.5 MHz
VFO-A
VRF
μ-T
VFO-B
3.5-4 MHz
1.8-2.5 MHz
50-60 MHz
VRF
22-30 MHz
14.5-22 MHz
13.5-14.5 MHz
10-11 MHz
6.5-7.5 MHz
3.5-4 MHz
1.8-2.5 MHz
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 157
OPTIONAL DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU-9000)
TFT DISPLAY UNIT (TFT-9000)
When the optional Data Management Unit (DMU-9000) and TFT Display Unit (TFT-9000) are installed, a wide range of
informational displays are available on the various pages of the TFT:
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
World Clock Page
Spectrum Scope Page
Audio Scope/Oscilloscope Page
Log Book Page
Temperature and SWR Status Page
Rotator Control Page
Memory Channel list Page
The ability to use the TFT display screen makes setup, adjustment, and monitoring of the various operational features of the
transceiver easy and efficient. For details of the operation with respect to the TFT and the Data Management Unit, please
refer to the “TFT Operating Manual.”
When the TFT is installed, the layout of the front panel of the transceiver changes to conform to the illustration below.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
CONT Button
VRF/μ-T Switch
This button turns the VFO-A CONTOUR filter on and
off.
This button turns the VFO-A receiver’s VRF filter on
and off.
Advice
When the μ-Tune Unit is installed, this switch serves
as the On/Off switch for the μ-Tune feature.
CONT
DNR Knob
CONT Knob
The inner CONT knob selects the desired VFO-A
CONTOUR filter response.
DNR Knob
The outer DNR knob selects the optimum VFO-A
Digital Noise Reduction response.
DNF Switch
This button turns the VFO-A Digital Notch Filter on
and off.
Page 158
VRF/μ-T
NTCH Knobs
VRF/μ-T Knob
The inner VRF/μ-T knob provides adjustment of
the VRF (Variable RF Filter) preselector circuit.
NTCH Knob
The outer NTCH knob adjusts the center frequency
of the VFO-A IF notch filter.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
OPTIONAL DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU-9000)
TFT DISPLAY UNIT (TFT-9000)
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
NTCH Switch
BAND Key
This button turns the VFO-A IF notch filter on and
off.
These keys allow one-touch selection of the desired
Amateur band (1.8 ~ 50 MHz).
What's more, the [0] ~ [9] keys may be used for direct
entry of a desired operating frequency during VFO
operation.
DNF Switch
This button turns the VFO-A Digital Notch Filter on
and off.
R.FLT Switch
This button selects the bandwidth for the VFO-A
receiver’s first IF Roofing Filter.
CF Card Slot
This slot accepts the supplied Compact Flash (CF)
Card, which allows storage, transfer, and recall of
transceiver configuration data and operator preferences, along with Log Book data, etc. When the CF
Card is successfully inserted, the Red LED by the slot
will light up.
To remove the card out from slot, press the small pushbutton at the right hand side of the slot.
Advice
If you get the [PLEASE CHECK A DISK] error message to the right of the MEM CARD indication on the
TFT, check the position of the CF Card in the slot for
proper alignment.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
TFT Display (see next page)
This 6.5-inch TFT display is used for viewing and
control of a variety of features, and it includes pages
including a World Map, World Clock, Spectrum
Scope, SWR and Transmitter Status, Log Book, Audio Scope and Oscilloscope, Memory Channel listing, and Menu listings, plus much more.
[F1] ~ [F7] / [DISP] Keys
[F1] ~ [F7] Key
These keys are used for selection of a variety of functions, depending on the TFT operation page selected.
The actual selection available at any given time is
shown on the TFT, just above the function key.
[DISP] (Display) Key
This key is used for selection of the desired TFT operation page.
Page 159
OPTIONAL DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU-9000)
TFT DISPLAY UNIT (TFT-9000)
TFT FEATURE / CONTROL DETAILS
Pressing any of these keys provides one-touch access
to the Amateur bands from 1.8 ~ 28 MHz. When the
ENT key has been pressed first, these keys then
serve as the frequency entry digits (“1” ~ “0”) during
direct frequency entry.
Pressing this key provides one-touch access to the 50
MHz Amateur band. When the ENT key has been
pushed first, to engage direct frequency entry, pressing this key sets the decimal point after the “MHz”
portion of the frequency.
This key turns the 28 MHz low-level (0 dBm) output
from the rear-panel’s TRV jack ON or OFF. When the
Transverter function is turned on, both the TFT and
the main frequency display will show the converted
frequency’s last two digits of the “MHz” field, according to the band programmed via Menu #034 (for example, if your transverted frequency is 144.200.00
MHz, the display will show “44.200.00” as the operating frequency.
Pressing this key selects the “General Coverage” VFO
register, for reception outside the Amateur bands.
For entering a frequency directly into the VFO-B register, press this key. Then use the keys described in
sections (A) and (B) above for entering the digits of
the desired frequency; when done, press the V-B
key once more to lock the newly- selected frequency
into the VFO-B register.
This key is used for gaining access to the Menu system, for configuring various transceiver characteristics. Menu operation is described in detail, in this
manual, beginning on page 110.
Important note
Pressing this key momentarily activates the Menu, and
the Menu selections will appear on the TFT screen;
once you are finished, you must press and hold in the
MNU key for two seconds to save any configuration changes (momentarily pressing MNU key to
exit will not save the changes).
These are the “Function” keys for the various functions associated with each page of the TFT’s operational capability. The exact function of each key will
depend on the page selected.
Pressing this key momentarily engages the “direct frequency entry” mode of operation, whereby the keys
described in the (A) and (B) sections above are used
for directly programming the operating frequency.
Once the frequency has been successfully entered,
press the ENT key once more to exit to the newlyselected frequency.
Page 160
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
OPTIONAL DATA MANAGEMENT UNIT (DMU-9000)
TFT DISPLAY UNIT (TFT-9000)
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
DISPLAY
AUDIO IN
Connect an external monitor (not supplied) to this jack.
An external monitor makes TFT display information
available on a much larger screen, for ease of viewing.
This terminal is for future expansion of the
transceiver’s capabilities. It is designed for connection to a computer’s sound card output, but at this time
it is not supported.
USB Jack
KEY BOARD
This jack supports the USB 1.1 protocol, for connection of a USB keyboard.
Note
Other types of USB-related accessories (other than a
keyboard) are not supported by this jack, and must
not be connected here.
Connect your keyboard (not supplied) to one of these
jacks in accordance with your keyboard type (“USB”
or “PS/2”) to use the Smart Memory Card for storage
of logbook data, and for input of your location when
setting up the World Clock.
AUDIO OUT
Connect a GPS receiver capable of supplying NMEA
data (not supplied) to this jack. When you connect the
GPS receiver to this jack, the “Rotator” page on the
TFT display will automatically include a Great Circle
map centered on your location.
This terminal is for future expansion of the
transceiver’s capabilities. It is designed for connection to a computer’s sound card input, but at this time
it is not supported.
COM
CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER
If you connect a properly-equipped after-market GPS receiver (not supplied) to the COM port on the back of the
transceiver, the “Rotator” page on the TFT display will
automatically include a Great Circle map centered on your
location.
Connect a GPS receiver capable of output of NMEA-0183
data to the COM port. The data line connects to Pin 2, and
the ground shield connects to Pin 5.
Pin 5
GND
Pin 2
GPS DATA IN
as viewed from
Rear Panel
This transceiver can support the GGA, GLL, and RMC
Data Sentences from the GPS unit.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 161
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Rx Frequency Range:
Tx Frequency Ranges:
Frequency Stability:
Operating Temperature Range:
Emission Modes:
Frequency Steps:
Antenna Impedance:
Power Consumption:
Supply Voltage:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight (approx.):
30 kHz - 60 MHz (Operating)
160 - 6 m (Amateur bands only)
160 - 6 m (Amateur bands only)
±0.03 ppm (after 5 min. @ –10 °C ~ +60 °C [+14 °F ~ +140 °F])
–10 °C ~ +60 °C [+14 °F ~ +140 °F]
A1A (CW), A3E (AM), J3E (LSB, USB), F3E (FM),
F1B (RTTY), F1D (PACKET), F2D (PACKET)
1/10 Hz (SSB,CW, & AM), 100 Hz (FM)
50 Ω, unbalanced
16.7 - 150 Ω, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 160 - 10 m Amateur bands, TX only)
25 - 100 Ω, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 6 m Amateur band, TX only)
Rx (no signal)
100 VA
Rx (signal present) 120 VA
Tx (200 W)
720 VA
90 VAC - 264 VAC (Universal)
20.4” x 6.5” x 17.3” (518 x 165 x 438.5 mm)
55 lbs (25 kg)
Transmitter
Power Output:
5 - 200 watts (5 - 75 watts AM carrier),
Class A mode (SSB): 5 - 75 watts maximum
Modulation Types:
J3E (SSB): Balanced,
A3E (AM): Low-Level (Early Stage),
F3E (FM): Variable Reactance
Maximum FM Deviation:
± 5.0 kHz/± 2.5 kHz
Harmonic Radiation:
Better than –60 dB (160 - 10m Amateur bands)
Better than –70 dB (6m Amateur band)
SSB Carrier Suppression:
At least 70 dB below peak output
Undesired Sideband Suppression: At least 80 dB below peak output
Audio Response (SSB):
Not more than -6 dB from 400 to 2600 Hz
3rd-order IMD:
–31 dB @ 200 watts PEP,
–50 dB @ 75 watts PEP (Class A mode)
Microphone Impedance:
600 Ω (200 to 10 kΩ)
Page 162
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Receiver
Circuit Type:
Intermediate Frequencies:
Sensitivity (IPO “OFF”):
Selectivity (–6/–66 dB):
Image Rejection:
Maximum Audio Output:
Audio Output Impedance:
Triple-conversion superheterodyne
40.455 MHz/455 kHz/30 kHz (24 kHz for FM)
SSB (2.4 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N)
0.2 μV (160 - 10 m Amateur bands)
0.125 μV (6 m Amateur band)
2 μV (0.1 - 50 MHz)
AM (6 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N, 30 % [email protected] Hz)
3.2 μV (0.1 - 1.8 MHz)
2 μV (1.8 - 30 MHz)
1 μV (6 m Amateur band)
FM (12 dB SINAD)
0.5 μV (10 m Amateur band)
0.35 μV (6 m Amateur band)
Mode
–6 dB
–66 dB
CW/RTTY/PKT
0.5 kHz or better
750 Hz or less
SSB
2.4 kHz or better
3.6 kHz or less
AM
9 kHz or better
18 kHz or less
FM
15 kHz or better
25 kHz or less
(WIDTH: Center, VRF: OFF)
70 dB or better (160 - 10m Amateur bands)
2.5 W into 4 Ω with 10% THD
4 to 8 Ω (4 Ω: nominal)
Specifications are subject to change, in the interest of technical improvement, without notice or obligation, and are guaranteed only within the amateur bands.
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
Page 163
NOTE
Page 164
FT DX 9000 CONTEST OPERATION MANUAL
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by VERTEX
STANDARD could void the user’s authorization to operate this device.
2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered,
by the User to operate within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public
Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22.
DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER
The scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or
modified a digital scanner receiver by any user.
WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR
RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND
FEDERAL LAW.
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
4-8-8 Nakameguro, Meguro-Ku, Tokyo 153-8644, Japan
VERTEX STANDARD
US Headquarters
10900 Walker Street, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A.
YAESU EUROPE B.V.
P.O. Box 75525, 1118 ZN Schiphol, The Netherlands
YAESU UK LTD.
Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close
Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K.
VERTEX STANDARD HK LTD.
Unit 5, 20/F., Seaview Centre, 139-141 Hoi Bun Road,
Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong
VERTEX STANDARD (AUSTRALIA) PTY., LTD.
Normanby Business Park, Unit 14/45 Normanby Road
Notting Hill 3168, Victoria, Australia
E
H
0
1
0
H
1
4
2
Copyright 2006
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
All rights reserved
No portion of this manual
may be reproduced without
the permission of
VERTEX STANDARD CO., LTD.
Printed in Japan.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement